JP2020054666A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving a performance effect.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of playing a game, comprises: detection means capable of detecting an operation by a player; a movable body which can be operated; and specific performance execution means for, based on detection of the operation by the player over a prescribed period by the detection means in an effective life, capable of executing a specific performance in which the movable body is operated in linkage with an operation by the player. The specific performance execution means operates the movable body in a first operation mode, when the operation by the player is detected by the detection means in a first situation in the effective life, and operates the movable body in a second operation mode when the operation by the player is detected by the detection means in a second situation different from the first situation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-28

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is an EL display which is a display device movably provided, and the EL display is operated by an operation (operation) of a player (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-20041 A

  However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the effect cannot be improved because the EL display merely moves by the operation of the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a staging effect.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of the player;
A movable body operably provided (eg, a movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R);
The movable body is operated in conjunction with the operation of the player based on the fact that the detection means detects the operation of the player over a predetermined period during the valid period (for example, the operation reception period of the push button 31B). Specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 8-24) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a movable body effect) to be performed;
With
The specific effect execution means,
If the detection means detects the player's movement in the first situation, the movable body is operated in the first operation mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. When the push button 31B is operated in a state where the 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin positions, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are driven at high speed and with low torque by driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. Part to operate),
When the detection means detects the player's movement in a second situation different from the first situation, the movable body is operated in the second operation mode (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not disposed at the origin positions, the movable motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode to thereby move the movable bodies 177SG302L. , 177SG302R operating at low speed),
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) that suggests that the game is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (D) or FIG. 9-2 (F)). Part that displays the title of the reach effect),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the reach D)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the production effect can be improved. In addition, since the notification of the title according to the suggested effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The first situation is a situation in which the movable body has not yet operated during execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A), the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is at the origin position ( The first position),
The second situation is a situation in which the movable body has already operated and is not operating during the execution of the specific effect (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 8-30 (C), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R (Not in the home position (first position))
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the operation mode is different between the first operation and the operation after the operation has been performed once, so that the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The movable body moves from the retracted position to the advanced position (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 (A) to 8-30 (E), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the origin positions (first positions). And a special operation (eg, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 (C) to 8-30 (D)) during the movement. It is characterized in that 177SG302L and 177SG302R can perform a part that rotates in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the united position (second position).
According to this feature, since the special operation is performed during the movement, unexpectedness can be given to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means to the means 3,
Operation confirmation means (for example, the production control CPU 120 shown in FIGS. 8-21) that allows the movable body to execute a confirmation operation (for example, an actual operation confirmation operation) for confirming an operation related to the performance of the movable body. A portion for performing a second initialization process).
The operation checking means causes the checking operation to be performed in the first operation mode regardless of whether or not the operation is detected by the detecting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. If the detected portion of the body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is not detected, after performing the non-detection operation control, the moving motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode to perform the actual operation check operation, and the origin is determined. When the detection portion of the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is detected by the detection sensor 177SG401, after performing the detection-time operation control, the moving motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode to execute the actual operation confirmation operation. Part)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the processing related to the confirmation operation can be simplified.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4,
The movable body moves forward from the evacuation position to the advanced position (for example, an operation in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the origin position toward the united position) and a retract operation (e.g., moves from the advanced position to the retracted position). The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the combined position toward the origin position).
Regardless of whether the operation mode of the advance operation is the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the evacuation operation is performed in the first operation mode (for example, as shown in a modified example 177SG-1). When moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position (first position), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R were moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position). Regardless of the driving mode of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R at all times, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are always driven in the speed priority mode.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the processing relating to the retreat operation can be simplified.

The gaming machine of the means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5,
A contact portion (for example, a contact boss 177SG385A, 177SG385B) provided to be able to contact the movable body;
When the movable body contacts the contact portion, the movable body changes its direction by operating while maintaining the contact state (for example, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are combined from the origin position (first position). When contacting the contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B at the third position on the way from the position (the second position) or the united position (the second position) to the origin position (the first position), the state of the contact is determined. The guided member 177SG320 is rotated about 180 degrees by moving to the right or left while maintaining the direction, so that the direction (posture) is changed from forward (first posture) to backward (second posture). (See FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the direction of the movable body is changed while operating, the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 6,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, setting means in Modification Example 177SG-2) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values;
Game control means capable of proceeding the game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value (for example, as shown in a modified example 177SG-2, the CPU 103 performs special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 5)). , Selecting a display result determination table having a different range of the determination value (MR1) assigned to the big hit according to the set value, and determining whether or not the variable display result is a big hit) ,
A setting control unit (for example, the CPU 103 in the modified example 177SG-2) capable of controlling to a change permission state for permitting a change of the set value by the setting unit with the start of power supply;
At least a movable control unit (for example, the production control CPU 120 is configured to control the return operation for returning the movable body to the origin position and the initial operation by the movable body). Part that performs the conversion process),
With
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when the change is permitted (for example, when the CPU 103 turns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in a modified example 177SG-3). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the change permission state under the condition of, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second initialization process (FIG. 8-21) in the change permission state, thereby controlling the non-detection operation. Part to execute etc.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, when the change is permitted, the return operation of returning the movable body to the origin position is performed, so that it is possible to prevent the change of the set value from being hindered.

The gaming machine of the means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 6,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, setting means in Modification Example 177SG-2) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values;
Game control means capable of proceeding the game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value (for example, as shown in a modified example 177SG-2, the CPU 103 performs special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 5)). , Selecting a display result determination table having a different range of the determination value (MR1) assigned to the big hit according to the set value, and determining whether or not the variable display result is a big hit) ,
A setting control unit (for example, the CPU 103 in the modified example 177SG-2) capable of controlling to a change permission state for permitting a change of the set value by the setting unit with the start of power supply;
At least movable control means capable of executing control of a return operation for returning the movable body to the origin position (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the second initialization processing shown in FIGS. 8-21);
With
The movable control means,
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not turned on in the change permission state, the control is performed to execute the return operation when the power supply is not started. A portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the second initialization process (FIGS. 8-21) to execute the non-detection operation control);
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 103 controls the pachinko gaming machine 1 to change to the change permission state when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. Does not execute the second initialization process (FIGS. 8-21) and does not execute the non-detection operation control).
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, when the change is permitted, the return operation of returning the movable body to the origin position is not performed, so that it is possible to prevent the change of the set value from being hindered.

  Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention according to the following means 9. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that performs a title display for notifying a type of a reach effect at the start of a reach effect, as disclosed in JP-A-2006-101428. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is desired to increase the effect of the game. In view of this point, there is a demand for providing a game machine capable of increasing the effect of the game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a gaming machine according to a ninth aspect of the present invention includes:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (D) or FIG. 9-2 (F)). Part that displays the title of the reach effect),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the reach D)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the effect of the title can be notified according to the suggested effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

  It should be noted that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a front view of the game machine concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. which are mounted in the game machine concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. (A) is a front view showing a state where the movable body of the rendering device according to the 177SG feature is at the first position, and (B) is a front view showing a state where the movable body of the rendering device according to the feature of 177SG is at the second position. It is. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the rendering device concerning the characteristic part of 177SG from diagonally front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the rendering device concerning the characteristic part of 177SG from diagonally behind. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the movable body concerning the characteristic part of 177SG from diagonally front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the movable body concerning the characteristic part of 177SG from diagonally back. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the rotating portion according to the 177SG characteristic portion is at the first projecting position, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the rotating portion according to the 177SG characteristic portion is at the accommodation position. It is principal part fracture | rupture sectional drawing which shows the structure of the lower part of the movable body which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a structure of a first drive mechanism according to a 177SG feature, and (B) is a plan view showing a guided member according to a 177SG feature. It is a top view which shows the relationship between the guide groove | channel, the to-be-guided member, and the moving body which concern on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A)-(E) is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of a guided member and a movable part which concern on the characteristic part of 177SG. (F)-(J) is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of the guided member and movable part which concern on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A)-(C) is a schematic explanatory view showing the relationship between the movable body and the image display device according to the characteristic portion of 177SG. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the movable body according to the 177SG feature is in the lowered position, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the movable body is at the up position according to the feature of 177SG. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the production control command concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. (A) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the big hit type determination table regarding the 177SG characteristic part, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various big hits concerning the 177SG characteristic part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning a characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example at the time of the non-detection operation control which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation speed at the time of operation control at the time of non-detection concerning the characteristic part of 177SG, operation control at the time of detection, and operation control for actual operation confirmation, and the accessory motor drive mode. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production processing during variable display concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production of a special role thing operation concerning a characteristic part of 177SG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the special production thing storing processing concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the accessory motor drive mode which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the super reach type, the button control, and the accessory motor drive mode concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. (A), (B) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the button operation and the accessory motor related to the characteristic portion of 177SG. (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation | movement aspect of the movable body in the super reach C concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation | movement aspect of the movable body in the super reach D concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit type in a special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the shift aspect of a 1st hold display and a 2nd hold display. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit type in a round display. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the production control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hits. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern for loss determination table. (A) is a front view of the display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. 5 is a time chart showing a display time of an item displayed on a display monitor. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a change in display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart showing a game control main process. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of a RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a figure showing change of a display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor at the time of a cold start, (B) shows the display mode of a display monitor at the time of occurrence of a setting value error error, or when it recovers from the power cut during a setting change. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display device during the execution of the setting change processing, and (B) is when a set value abnormality error occurs, or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of the special symbol display device when it recovers from the power interruption during the setting change. It is a figure showing a part of timer interrupt for game control. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is an explanatory view showing a notification mode at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example at the time of non-detection operation control and operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in operation | movement of the operation control at the time of non-detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. 9 is a timing chart showing a relationship between a change of a set value and a confirmation end timing of the set value, and the number of executions of a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control process processing.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid 82 is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” and the big hit symbol If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved from the normal state, Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game and the display result of the variable display of the decorative design) to be "big hit" (also referred to as big hit reliability or big hit expectation) according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later, and various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed) Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal and a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after finishing the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, the start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning start-up thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or a big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (prior determination) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used by using a random value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change processing includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation reaches the special figure fluctuation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol fluctuation processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. If the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round for opening the big winning port has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether the number of times of execution of the round has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to perform a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibit state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that it is possible to confirm which effect control command has been received and the content specified by the effect control command in the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative luminous body such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the device, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using the various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a control effect command at the time of a start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects control such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The wait process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect process. Also, when the reception waiting time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hitting effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hitting game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In the big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to, for example, receiving a command designating the big hit game state from the main board 11. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Run. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form that is distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a detachable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 177SG)
FIG. 8A is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area 177SG10 is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area. In the gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 177SG50 having a glass window 177SG50a is provided rotatably about the left side, and the gaming area 177SG10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 177SG50. When the glass door frame 177SG50 is closed, the game area 177SG10 can be seen through the glass window 177SG50a.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the game board 2 is formed of a translucent synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacryl resin in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and obstructs the front face of the game board. It comprises a board 2A provided with nails (not shown), guide rails 177SG2b, and the like, and a spacer member 2B integrally attached to the back side of the board 2A. The game board 2 is formed of a non-translucent member such as a plywood and the like in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. The game board 2 is provided with a nail plate (not shown) and guide rails 177SG2b on the front face of the game board. May be configured.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 8A, on the right side of the game area), a variable display of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information (also a special figure game). ), A first special symbol display device 177SG4A and a second special symbol display device 177SG4B are provided. These are composed of a 7-segment LED (light emitting diode) or the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 177SG4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed. The opening 177SG2c in the game board 2 is provided with a frame-shaped center decorative frame 177SG51.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern. Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol that are executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display. In the display area, a first suspended display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the first special figure game (variable display of decorative symbols) suspended for execution is displayed right-justified, and the execution is suspended. The second hold display image (in this case, a circle image) corresponding to the second special figure game (variable display of decorative symbols) is displayed left-justified.

  A first hold storage display area 177SG5D and a second hold storage display area 177SG5U are set at two lower left and right portions of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 177SG5D and the second hold storage display area 177SG5U, a hold storage display is performed in which the number of change storages (variable display hold numbers) corresponding to the special figure game can be specified.

  Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 177SG6A or the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 177SG6B. ) Is generated based on the start winning. That is, a start condition (also referred to as an “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of effect symbols is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. Due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, when the start condition allowing the start of the variable display game is not established, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is performed. Done. In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the hold storage display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening is set to a circular white display, and the second starting winning opening is set. Similarly, the hold storage display generated based on the start winning prize due to the passing (entering) of the game ball is similarly a circular black display.

  In the following description, the first hold storage display area 17′SG5D and the second hold storage display area 177SG5U may be referred to as a hold display area, and the number of hold storages is represented by the first hold storage display area 177SG5D and the second hold storage area. It can be recognized by the number of hold storage displays displayed in the storage display area 177SG5U. Further, a display in which the suspended storage displays are gathered may be referred to as a suspended display.

  The hold display in the first hold storage display area 177SG5D and the second hold storage display area 177SG5U is based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, or the second display. The display mode (for example, display color and shape) may be changed according to whether the game ball is generated based on a winning start by a game ball passing (entering) the starting winning opening. In this embodiment, “execute” and “implement” are synonymous.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8A, the first special symbol display device 177SG4A and the second special symbol display device 177SG4B are displayed together with the reservation storage display area so that the number of special figure reservation storages can be specified. A first hold display 177SG25A and a second hold display 177SG25B are provided. The first reservation display 177SG25A displays the first special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner. The second reservation display 177SG25B displays the second special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner. The first special figure reserved storage number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reserved storage number is the number of storages in which execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. In particular, the number of suspended storages in the variable display obtained by adding the first special figure suspended storage number and the second special figure suspended storage number is also referred to as a total suspended storage number. When simply referred to as “the number of special figure reserved storages”, it generally refers to a concept including any of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number. (The concept includes the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number, but excludes the total reserved storage number).

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 177SG6A and a variable winning ball device 177SG6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 177SG6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning prize ball device 177SG6B has a movable plate that has a movable plate that is changed by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 8B) for a normal electric accessory between a closed state where the first projecting position is located and an open state where the retracted position is located. And a second starting winning port is formed. In the variable winning prize ball device 177SG6B, for example, when the movable plate is in the first projecting position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable plate projects to the game area 177SG10 side, and the game ball is placed in the second starting winning opening. It is in a closed state where it does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 177SG6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable plate is in a retracted position in which the movable plate is retracted to the game board 2 side when the solenoid 81 is on. (It is also said that the second start winning opening is in an open state.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started.

  Below the winning ball device 177SG6A and the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, a special variable winning ball device 177SG7 having a large winning port is provided. The special variable winning ball device 177SG7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 8B), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form a mouth.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 177SG7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening port and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 177SG7, when the large winning opening door solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the large winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out, for example, than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 8A, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 177SG20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 177SG20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from a special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 177SG41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 177SG41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  On the right side of the normal symbol display 177SG20, there is provided a general symbol hold display 177SG25C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 177SG25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  An effect device 177SG300 that operates according to the effect is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 8B).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 8B).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 177SG41, the ordinary symbol game by the normal symbol display 177SG20 is started. In the case where the game ball has passed through the passage gate 177SG41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball has passed through the passage gate 177SG41 but the general-purpose game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When it is "per day", an opening control for opening the variable winning ball device 177SG6B for a predetermined period is performed (the second starting winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 177SG6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” and the big hit symbol If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 177SG7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved from the normal state, Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by, for example, turning on / off the light, or operating the movable body of the effect device 177SG300.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R provided on the image display device 5 as an effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game and the display result of the variable display of the decorative design) to be "big hit" (also referred to as big hit reliability or big hit expectation) according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative pattern display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later, and various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (a first special symbol display device 177SG4A, a second special symbol display device 177SG4B, a normal symbol display 177SG20, a first hold). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 177SG25A, the second reservation display 177SG25B, the general-purpose reservation display 177SG25C, and the like, and a solenoid driving signal).

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various kinds of information such as driving of the movable body of the effect device 177SG300, error notification, and notification of power-off recovery).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed) Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300 to a driving circuit that drives the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300 or the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  Note that sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), control of the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300, etc.) The control CPU 120 may execute it.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(Progress of game and production)
A player rotates the hitting operation handle of the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that a game medium (game ball) is shot toward the game area.

(Progress of the game controlled by the main board 11)
When a game ball that has flowed down the game area has passed through the passage gate 177SG41, a general-purpose game (variable display of a normal symbol) is started. In addition, when another general-purpose game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as during the opening control described below, the general-purpose game is limited to four or more. Execution is suspended. The suspended general-purpose game is executed when a start condition for starting the general-purpose game is satisfied (for example, no other general-purpose game is executed and the release control is not performed). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 177SG41 when the number of stored general-purpose drawings has reached the upper limit, the number of stored general-purpose drawings is invalidated without increasing.

  The fluctuation display results that are stopped and displayed in the ordinary figure game include a symbol per ordinary figure (for example, ordinary figure such as “7”) and a lost figure symbol (for example, ordinary figure such as “−”). . The time when the symbol per symbol is stopped (derived) is when the variable display result is "per symbol". The time when the normal figure lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) is when the variable display result is “normal figure lost”.

  In the case of “per-figure”, an opening control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the variable winning ball apparatus 177SG6B is tilted for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is in an open state). In the case of "normal figure loss", the opening control is not performed.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 177SG6A, the first special figure game is started. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the second special figure game is started. Note that when the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already being executed or when a big hit game state described later is controlled, four each are displayed. The execution of the special map game is suspended with the upper limit set. The suspended special-figure game is executed when a start condition for starting the special-figure game is satisfied (for example, no other special-figure game is executed and the big hit game is not being performed).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning opening while the first special figure reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the entry is invalidated without increasing the first special figure reserved storage number ( There may be prize balls). When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening while the second special figure reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the entry is invalidated without increasing the second special figure reserved storage number ( There may be prize balls).

  The entry (winning) of the game ball, which increases the first special figure reserved storage number, into the first starting winning opening is also referred to as first starting winning. The entry (winning) of the game ball, which increases the number of second special figure reservation storages, into the second starting winning opening is also referred to as a second starting winning. These winnings are collectively referred to simply as starting winnings.

  The fluctuation display result stopped and displayed in the special figure game includes a big hit symbol (for example, a special figure such as “3” and “7”) and a lost symbol (for example, a special figure such as “−”). . When the big hit symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display result is "big hit". When the lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display result is "losing".

  When the change display result of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is "big hit" (specific display result), the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. When the fluctuation display result is “losing”, the state is not controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 177SG7 is in an open state. The open state is a timing that elapses of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and a timing that the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine), whichever is earlier. To be continued. Such an open state is called a round game (also simply referred to as “round”). In the big hit game state, the round game is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15 times”) is reached (the large winning opening is closed in a period other than the round game).

  In the “big hit”, big hit types of “non-probable change” and “probable change” are set. When the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, the jackpot symbol “3” is stopped and displayed. When the jackpot type is “probable change”, the jackpot symbol “7” is stopped and displayed.

  When the jackpot type is “probable change”, the “big hit” may be called “probable change”, and when the jackpot type is “non-probable”, the “big hit” may be called “non-probable change”. In addition, a jackpot game state based on a “probably variable jackpot” may be referred to as a “probably variable jackpot game state”. In addition, a jackpot game state based on the “non-probable variable jackpot” may be referred to as a “non-probable variable jackpot game state”.

  After the probable change big hitting game state is ended, the probability that the fluctuation display result is "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to a probable change state in which the probability is higher than the normal state. The certain change state is continued until the next big hit game state is started.

  After the probable variable jackpot game state or the non-probable variable jackpot game state is completed, the average variable display time (variable display period) is controlled to a time reduction state in which the average variable display time is shorter than the normal state. In the time-saving state, either one of the end condition of the predetermined number (100 times in this embodiment) of the special figure game and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. Continue until you do.

  In the time saving state, the variable winning prize ball device 177SG6B is switched between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening compared to the non-time saving state in which the time saving state is not the normal state. May be changed. For example, a control for shortening the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary game (the variable display period of the ordinary figure, also referred to as the ordinary figure fluctuation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation display in each ordinary game is performed. The variable winning prize ball device 177SG6B may be changed between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change manner by a control or the like that improves the probability that the result is “per day” as compared with the normal state. Such control is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time saving control” or “high base control”). By controlling to such a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and the gaming state becomes more advantageous for the player than the normal state.

  Note that the normal state is a game state other than an advantageous state for the player such as a big hit game state, a time saving state, a probability change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability of becoming a "hit" and the probability that the variation display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the insertion.

  The time reduction state is also referred to as “high base”, and the game state that is not the time reduction state is also referred to as “low base” or “non-time reduction state”. The probable change state is also referred to as “high-probability”, and the game state that is not the probable change state is also referred to as “low-probability”, “non-probability”, and the like.

  (Progress of the game controlled by the effect control board 12)

  The "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R provided on the image display device 5 correspond to the start of the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol (this is also a kind of effect) is started. At the timing when the variable display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative symbol (variable display result) which is a variable display result of the decorative symbol (variable display result) (Combination of three decorative symbols) is also stopped (derived display).

  During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a jackpot combination described below (“reach variation”). ) Is a display mode or the like in which the fluctuation is continued.

  In this embodiment, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode being set during variable display. As reach effects, normal reach, super reach A, super reach B, super reach C, and super reach D, each of which has a different effect mode, are prepared. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree is higher in the order of super reach D> super reach C> super reach B> super reach A> normal reach.

  The big hit expectation is, for example, a ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, and here, is also a ratio at which the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “big hit”.

  When the variation display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decoration symbol. (The display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7” for a probability variable hit, “7” for a non-probable variable hit) on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, At the time of "6") is stopped and displayed.

  When the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. There is. Further, when the variable display result is “losing”, after the decorative pattern variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the big hit combination (“reach loss combination” ") May be stopped and displayed.

  The effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing various effects relating to the game, such as a variable display control of a decorative symbol and a notice effect, based on an effect control command (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. .

  In addition, as the announcement effect that the effect control CPU 120 executes during the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, a jackpot announcement effect indicating a possibility of a big hit, a reach announcement indicating whether or not a reach is reached, a stop symbol, and the like. A plurality of notices to be executed at the start of variable display and at the time of reaching a reach, such as a notice of a stop symbol to be notified, a notice of a notice of whether or not a game state is a probability variation state (whether or not to be hidden), and the like. Including.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as various effects including the above-mentioned notice, a movable body effect by the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R of the effect device 177SG300 and a combined effect by the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. . These various effects are executed, for example, at a predetermined timing during variable display or at a timing when the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In the present embodiment, an effect using the effect device 177SG300 is executed during execution of the super reach (details will be described later).

(Director 177SG300)
Next, details of effect device 177SG300 will be described based on FIGS. 8-3 to 8-15. 8A is a front view illustrating a state in which the movable body of the rendering device is at the first position, and FIG. 8B is a front view illustrating a state in which the movable body of the rendering device is at the second position. FIG. 8-4 is an exploded perspective view showing a state of the structure of the rendering device as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 8-5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state of the structure of the rendering device as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 8-6 is an exploded perspective view showing the state of the structure of the movable body as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 8-7 is an exploded perspective view showing a state where the structure of the movable body is viewed obliquely from behind. 8A is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the rotating unit is at the first protruding position, and FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the rotating unit is at the accommodation position. FIG. 8-9 is a fragmentary sectional view showing the structure of the lower part of the movable body. 8A is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the first drive mechanism, and FIG. 8B is a plan view showing a guided member. FIG. 8-11 is a plan view illustrating a relationship among the guide groove, the guided member, and the moving body. FIGS. 8A to 8E are diagrams illustrating operation modes of the guided member and the movable unit. FIGS. 8F to 8J are diagrams illustrating the operation of the guided member and the movable part. 8A to 8C are schematic explanatory diagrams illustrating a relationship between the movable body and the image display device. 8A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the movable body is at the lowered position, and FIG. FIGS. A16 to (F) are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an operation mode of a movable body in super reach.

  In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is defined as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is defined as the rear. Further, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions as viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-3 to 8-5, the rendering device 177SG300 is provided with a base frame 177SG301 formed in a square frame shape in a front view, and movably in the left-right direction and the up-down direction with respect to the base frame 177SG301. Movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, a first drive mechanism 177SG303 for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R in the left-right direction, and a second drive mechanism 177SG304 for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R in the vertical direction. The image display device 5 can be visually recognized through the opening of the base frame 177SG301. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R abut on each other (or a first position (origin position) separated from each other in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 8-3A), as shown in FIG. It is possible to move in the left-right direction between a second position (also referred to as a united position) that approaches (close to), and at the second position, a lower position shown in FIG. 8-3 (A) and a lower position shown in FIG. 8-3 (B). It is movable in the up-down direction between the ascending positions shown, and the direction (posture) can be changed at a third position between the first position and the second position.

  Next, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7. Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are formed symmetrically and have substantially the same configuration, the left movable body 177SG302L will be described below, and the description of the right movable body 177SG302R will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7, the movable body 177SG302L is movable in the left-right direction by the first driving mechanism 177SG303, and is provided at a position below the movable body 177SG310 that is provided non-rotatably. A guided member 177SG320, which is guided to move by guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R described later, and a movable member 177SG320 at a position above the moving body 177SG310, and is vertically movable with respect to the moving body 177SG310 and the guided member 177SG320. And a movable portion 177SG330 movably provided.

  The movable portion 177SG330 is rotatable about a pedestal 177SG331 attached to the upper end of a rotating shaft 177SG311 vertically penetrating the moving body 177SG310, and a guide rod 177SG337 described later above the pedestal 177SG331, and is movable vertically. The rotating base 177SG332 provided, the front cover 177SG333 covering the front side of the rotating base 177SG332, the rear cover 177SG334 covering the back side of the rotating base 177SG332, and the rotating base 177SG332 can be vertically rotated. And a rotating member 177SG335 provided in the main body.

  A vertically extending guide bar 177SG337 is provided on the upper left front corner of the upper surface of the base 177SG331 so that the rotating base 177SG332 is guided so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A rotation stopper 177SG336 for restricting rotation around the guide rod 177SG337 is provided upright at the corner. Note that the rotation stop member 177SG336 has a length capable of restricting rotation of the rotation base 177SG332 from a lowering position to an ascending position described later.

  An LED substrate 177SG339 on which a plurality of movable LEDs 177SG338F are mounted on the front surface of the rotation base 177SG332 so as to be able to irradiate light toward the front is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the rotation base 177SG332. Light is emitted outward through a light transmitting lens portion 177SG340F formed on the front cover 177SG333. Although not shown, a plurality of movable LEDs 177SG338B are mounted on the rear surface of the LED board 177SG339 so as to irradiate light forward, and the light from the movable LEDs 177SG338B is covered by emitting light from the movable LEDs 177SG338B. The light is emitted outward through a light transmitting lens portion 177SG340B formed on the 177SG334.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, a first rotation shaft 177SG360 facing the front-rear direction is protrudingly provided at a lower portion of the front surface of the rotation base 177SG332, and the first rotation shaft 177SG360 has A first link member 177SG361, which is pivotally supported at one end to a first shaft portion of the rotating member 177SG335 via a pivot 177SG364, is rotatably supported. In addition, a second rotating shaft 177SG362 is protrudingly provided below the first rotating shaft 177SG360 on the front surface of the rotating base 177SG332, and one end of the second rotating shaft 177SG362 is provided at one end of the rotating member 177SG335. A second link member 177SG363 pivotally supported by the two shafts via a pivot 177SG365 is pivotably supported.

  An arc-shaped gear portion 177SG366 is formed on a part of the periphery of the second rotation shaft 177SG362 in the second link member 177SG363, and the gear portion 177SG366 has a gear for rotation fixed to the rear surface of the rotation base 177SG332. A drive gear 177SG368 fixed to the drive shaft of the motor 177SG367 meshes.

  The rotating member 177SG335 has a first protruding position (origin position) that protrudes rightward and downward with respect to the rotating base 177SG332, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), and as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B). Between the first projecting position and the retracted position toward the rotating base 177SG332 to partially accommodate between the rotating base 177SG332 and the front cover 177SG333 (see FIG. 8-8 (B)). And is rotatably provided. Further, a second projecting position (see FIG. 8-3 (B)) projecting rightward and upward with respect to the rotation base 177SG332 between the first projecting position (origin position, see FIG. 8-3 (A)) and the accommodation position. ) Can also be stopped.

  More specifically, at the first protruding position shown in FIG. 8A, the upper portion of the second link member 177SG363 is tilted slightly to the left to contact the boss 177SG369 protruding from the rotation base 177SG332 to be counterclockwise. The rotation of the rotation member 177SG335 is restricted by the rotation of the rotation being restricted. Here, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the drive gear 177SG368 is rotated by the rotation motor 177SG367, the second link member 177SG363 is rotated clockwise and the pivot 177SG365 is rotated second. The first link member 177SG361 rotates counterclockwise, and the pivot 177SG364 moves in an arc around the first rotation shaft 177SG360, while moving in an arc around the shaft 177SG362. The member 177SG335 rotates from the first protruding position to the storage position. Since the two first link members 177SG361 and the second link member 177SG363 are pivotally supported at two locations in this manner, the rotation can be performed more compactly than the rotation about one axis.

  At the upper end of the front cover 177SG333, fixed rails 177SG350L and 177SG350R (see FIGS. 8-3 and 8-4) extending in the left-right direction on the upper side of the base frame 177SG301 and between these fixed rails 177SG350L and 177SG350R. A guide portion 177SG342, which is guided to move in the left-right direction by a movable rail 177SG351 movably provided in the up-down direction, is rotatably attached to a rotation base 177SG332 about a shaft portion 177SG343 facing the up-down direction.

  As described above, the movable portion 177SG330 is configured such that the front cover 177SG333 and the rear cover 177SG334 are attached to and integrated with the front and rear surfaces of the rotation base 177SG332, and the movable base 177SG330A is vertically moved with respect to the movable base 177SG330A. A rotating member 177SG330B including a rotating member 177SG335 provided rotatably in the first direction. The first state in which the rotating portion 177SG330B is in the first projecting position or the second projecting position, and the rotating portion 177SG330B The state can be changed to the second state at the storage position.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, the movable base portion 177SG330A has a shape imitating a half of the body of the airplane, the rotating portion 177SG330B has a shape imitating a blade, the movable body 177SG302L has a right half of the airplane, and the movable body 177SG302R has a shape similar to a blade. It is a model that constitutes the left half of the airplane. On the other hand, frame covers 177SG370L and 177SG370R simulating a half of an airplane having translucent lens portions 177SG371L and 177SG371R are attached to the left and right sides of the base frame 177SG301, respectively.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the first position, the right half of the airplane is imitated by the front cover 177SG333 and the frame cover 177SG370L of the left movable body 177SG302L. One first left rendering part is formed, and the first cover 177SG333 of the right movable body 177SG302R and the frame cover 177SG370R form one first right rendering part that imitates the left half of the airplane.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the second position, the rear cover 177SG334 of the left movable member 177SG302L and the rear cover 177SG334 of the right movable member 177SG302R move right and left. By combining them side by side, one second production section that simulates the entire airplane is formed.

  Further, in the first left directing part and a part of the first right directing part, a light-transmitting lens part 177SG340F of the front cover 177SG333 and a light-transmitting lens part 177SG371L, 177SG371R of the frame covers 177SG370L and 177SG370R imitating half of the cockpit are provided. Constitutes one first light emitting part, and a part of the second effect part constitutes one second light emitting part by left and right translucent lens parts 177SG340B and 177SG340B which simulate half of the cockpit of the rear cover 177SG334. You.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10 (A), a vertical hole 177SG312 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the moving body 177SG310, and the rotating shaft 177SG311 is rotatably inserted into the vertical hole 177SG312. Have been. The upper portion of the rotating shaft 177SG311 is non-rotatably fitted into a shaft hole 177SG313 formed in the base 177SG331. Further, a horizontal hole 177SG314 penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in the moving body 177SG310 so as not to intersect with the vertical hole 177SG312, and a rotating shaft 177SG311 is rotatably inserted into the vertical hole 177SG312.

  The rotating shaft 177SG311 has an upper part non-rotatably fitted to a shaft hole 177SG313 formed in the base 177SG331, and a lower part non-rotatably fitted to a shaft hole 177SG321 of the guided member 177SG320. That is, since the movable portion 177SG330 and the guided member 177SG320 are integrated via the rotation shaft 177SG311, the guided member 177SG320 forms a part of the movable portion 177SG330.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the guided member 177SG320 is a disk-shaped member centered on a circular shaft hole 177SG321. At two locations on the right side of the peripheral wall, contact recesses 177SG322A, 177SG322B capable of accommodating contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B to be described later are formed at intervals of about 90 degrees, and a locking recess 177SG323 is formed on the left side of the peripheral wall. Are formed. Further, the peripheral wall 177SG322C on the rear side of the contact recess 177SG322A and the peripheral wall 177SG322D on the front side of the contact recess 177SG322B are located outward of an arc centered on the shaft hole 177SG321 (see the dashed line in FIG. 8-10 (B)). The peripheral walls 177SG322C and 177SG322D are substantially parallel to each other. The peripheral walls 177SG322E and 177SG322F linearly extend leftward from the tips of the peripheral walls 177SG322C and 177SG322D. In other words, the end portions of the peripheral walls 177SG322C and 177SG322E and the end portions of the peripheral walls 177SG322D and 177SG322F are formed with the rotation regulating portions 177SG325A and 177SG325 that protrude outward from an arc centered on the shaft hole 177SG321. The guide member 177SG320 is formed in a non-circular shape.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-10 to 8-13, linear guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R for guiding the moving body 177SG310 in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the member constituting the lower side of the base frame 177SG301. Have been. Specifically, the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R are formed in a groove shape that opens upward in a vertical cross-sectional view by a bottom wall 177SG381, a front wall 177SG382, and a rear wall 177SG383, and the guided member 177SG320 is provided to be movable in the left-right direction. Have been. The front-rear dimension L1 of the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R is slightly longer than the diameter 2R of the guided member 177SG320, and is shorter than the dimension L2 passing through the apexes and the center of the rotation restricting portions 177SG325A and 177SG325 of the guided member 177SG320. (2R <L1 <L2).

  At the left and right ends of the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R, a transmission gear group 177SG392R that is locked by the locking recess 177SG323 of the guided member 177SG320 when the movable body 177SG302L and 177SG302R is located at the first position. When the bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the second position, a locking piece 177SG324B that is locked to the locking recess 177SG323 of the guided member 177SG320 is provided, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the first position and The rotation at the second position is regulated.

  At a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction of the bottom wall 177SG381, columnar contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B are erected at positions near the rear wall 177SG383 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the left-right direction. Further, portions corresponding to the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B on the rear wall 177SG383 are swelled rearward, and can accommodate the rotation regulating portions 177SG325A and 177SG325 when the guided member 177SG320 rotates as described later. Recesses 177SG386A and 177SG386B are formed inside. A bearing portion 177SG387 is formed between the left and right guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R.

  The first driving mechanism 177SG303 includes driving shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R for moving the moving body 177SG310, moving motors 117SG391L and 117SG391R for rotating the driving shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R around the axis, and moving motors 117SG1L. The transmission gear group mainly includes transmission gear groups 177SG392L and 177SG392R each including a plurality of driven gears for transmitting the power of the 117SG391R to the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R.

  Note that the first drive mechanism 117SG303 includes an origin detection sensor 177SG401 that can detect that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the origin position (first position), and movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at the combined position (the second position). At the position), a combination detection sensor 177SG402 capable of detecting that it is arranged at the position) is provided. The origin detection sensor 177SG401 and the combination detection sensor 177SG402 are connected to the effect control board 12.

  The drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R extend in the left-right direction so as to extend above the front wall 177SG382, one end is supported by a central bearing portion 177SG387, and the other end is provided on the left and right sides of the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R. Supported. The moving body 177SG310 is inserted into the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R through the horizontal holes 177SG314, and the inner periphery of the horizontal hole 177SG314 is formed in a spiral groove 177SG390A formed on the peripheral surface of the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R. A locking portion 177SG315 protruding from the surface is slidably locked. Therefore, in the moving body 177SG310, the guided member 177SG320 connected via the rotating shaft 177SG311 is guided by the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and the rotation around the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R is restricted. Therefore, the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R rotate in the left-right direction by rotating.

  Next, operation modes of the first driving mechanism 177SG303 and the movable body 177SG302L will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13. Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are symmetrical and have almost the same operation mode, only the operation mode of the movable body 177SG302L will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when the movable body 177SG302L is at the first position, the guided member 177SG320 is in a state in which the transmission gear group 177SG392R is locked in the locking recess 177SG323 at the left end of the guide groove 177SG380L. Is maintained in. At this time, the movable portion 177SG330 has the front cover 177SG333 facing forward, and the rotating portion 177SG330B is located at the first projecting position.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the moving body 177SG310 moves rightward by the rotation of the drive shaft 177SG390L by the movement motor 117SG391L. At this time, rotation of the guided member 177SG320 about the rotation axis 177SG311 is restricted by the peripheral wall 177SG322E approaching substantially parallel to the front wall 177SG382 and the peripheral wall 177SG322F approaching substantially parallel to the rear wall 177SG383. Therefore, the movable portion 177SG330 moves rightward without changing its direction. Then, when the peripheral wall 177SG322C moves to the third position between the first position and the second position, the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (C) and 8-12 (D), the contact boss 177SG385A is arranged at a position displaced backward from the movement locus of the rotation shaft 177SG311 which is the center of the guided member 177SG320. As a result, the moving body 177SG310 continues to move rightward, so that when the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A at the third position, the moving body 177SG310 moves rightward while maintaining the contacted state. Accordingly, the guided member 177SG320 rotates counterclockwise around the contact boss 177SG385A. Further, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 8C, the tip of the rotation restricting portion 177SG325A is housed in the housing recess 177SG386A, so that rotation of the guided member 177SG320 in the guide groove 177SG380L is allowed. . Further, as the guided member 177SG320 rotates, the contact boss 177SG385A is accommodated in the contact recess 177SG322A.

  As illustrated in FIG. 8E, when the guided member 177SG320 rotates about 90 degrees after the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A, the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A. The peripheral wall 177SG322D of the contact recess 177SG322B contacts the contact boss 177SG385B.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 8-13 (F) to 8-13 (H), the state in which the peripheral wall 177SG322C abuts on the abutment boss 177SG385A by the moving body 177SG310 continuing to move rightward. The guide member 177SG320 rotates counterclockwise around the contact boss 177SG385B by continuing to move rightward while maintaining the state in which the peripheral wall 177SG322D is in contact with the contact boss 177SG385B. To go. In addition, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 8H, the tip of the rotation regulating portion 177SG325B is accommodated in the accommodating recess 177SG386B, whereby the guided member 177SG320 is allowed to rotate. Further, as the guided member 177SG320 rotates, the contact boss 177SG385B is accommodated in the contact recess 177SG322B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (I), with the rotation of the guided member 177SG320 by about 180 degrees, the movable portion 177SG330 integrated with the guided member 177SG320 moves by about 180 degrees around the rotation shaft 177SG311. The rotation changes the orientation (posture). Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) to 8-13 (I), two contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B are arranged apart from each other in the moving direction of the movable body 177SG302L, and the peripheral wall 177SG322C is used for contact. The state of contact with the boss 177SG385A is released and the peripheral wall 177SG322D contacts the contact boss 177SG385B, so that the rotation is continuously performed.

  As shown in FIG. 8J, after the contact state of the peripheral wall 177SG322D from the contact boss 177SG385B is released, the peripheral wall 177SG322D moves rightward without changing its direction. At this time, the rotation of the guided member 177SG320 about the rotation axis 177SG311 is restricted by the peripheral wall 177SG322F approaching substantially parallel to the front wall 177SG382 and the peripheral wall 177SG322E approaching substantially parallel to the rear wall 177SG383. Therefore, the movable portion 177SG330 moves rightward without changing its direction. When the movable body 177SG302L reaches the second position, the guided member 177SG320 is maintained in a state where the locking piece 177SG324B is locked in the locking recess 177SG323 at the right end of the guide groove 177SG380L. At this time, the movable portion 177SG330 has the rear cover 177SG334 facing forward, and the rotating portion 177SG330B is located at the storage position.

  Although details of the operation mode when the movable body 177SG302L moves from the second position to the first position are omitted, the direction is changed by rotating in the opposite direction to that when moving from the first position to the second position. Will be.

  As described above, when the movable body 177SG302L comes into contact with the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B at the third position on the way from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position. The guided member 177SG320 rotates about 180 degrees by keeping moving to the right or left while maintaining the state, so that the direction (posture) of the movable portion 177SG330 is changed from forward (first posture) to backward (second posture). ).

  Next, the positional relationship between the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R, the image display device 5, and the game board 2 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the first position, the rotating portion 177SG330B is at the first protruding position. The distance L3 from the rotating shaft 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is shorter than the length L4 from the rotating shaft 177SG311 to the tip of the rotating portion 177SG330B at the first projecting position (L3 < L4) When the movable portion 177SG330 tries to rotate at the third position in the first state in which the rotating portion 177SG330B projects to the first projecting position, the rotating portion 177SG330B comes into contact with the display screen of the image display device 5. Would.

  When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the second position, the rotating part 177SG330B is at the second projecting position. The distance L3 from the rotating shaft 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is shorter than the length L5 from the rotating shaft 177SG311 to the tip of the rotating portion 177SG330B at the second projecting position (L3 < L5) When the movable portion 177SG330 tries to rotate at the third position in the first state in which the rotating portion 177SG330B projects to the second projecting position, the rotating portion 177SG330B comes into contact with the display screen of the image display device 5. Would.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8C, before the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate, that is, before reaching the third position, the rotating portion 177SG330B is moved to the first projecting position or the second projecting position. By moving the movable portion 177SG330 from the first state to the second state, the distance L3 from the rotation axis 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is changed from the rotation axis 177SG311 to the accommodation position. Is larger than the length L6 to the tip of the rotating portion 177SG330B (L3> L6), so that the rotating portion 177SG330B is prevented from contacting the display screen of the image display device 5 when rotating. You.

  Next, the second drive mechanism 177SG304 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-4, 8-5, and 8-15. As shown in FIGS. 8-4 and 8-5, the second drive mechanism 177SG304 includes a lifting motor 177SG305 fixed to a mounting member 177SG308 mounted on the upper side rear surface of the base frame 177SG301, and a lifting motor 177SG305. A driven gear 177SG306 meshing with the drive gear 177SG305A, and a connection elongated hole 177SG307A into which one end is rotatably supported by a mounting member 177SG308, and into which a connection shaft 177SG306A protruding from the vicinity of a peripheral portion on the front surface of the driven gear 177SG306 is inserted; A lift arm 177SG307 at the tip of which a movable rail 177SG351 is pivotally supported.

  The movable rail 177SG 351 is vertically inserted by a pair of left and right elevating guides 177 SG 353 and 177 SG 353, which are formed on the upper side of the base frame 177 SG 301, and have guide rollers 177 SG 352 and 177 SG 352 provided on the left and right sides of the rear surface. You are being guided. A long hole 177SG354 is formed between the lifting guides 177SG353 and 177SG353 so that the connecting shaft between the tip of the lifting arm 177SG307 and the movable rail 177SG351 can be inserted in the vertical direction. In the second driving mechanism 177SG304 configured as described above, the movable rail 177SG351 moves in the vertical direction when the elevating arm 177SG307 is rotated about one end by the elevating motor 177SG305.

  Next, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment will be described. The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 8-16 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 8A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 177SG4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 177SG4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the decoration design display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the image display device 5 in response to the change display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result designation command, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), for example, a determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variation display result is “losing” or “big hit” or a variation display result is obtained. Different EXT data is set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type in the case of "big hit" (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result designating command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designating command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the result of the preliminary determination that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable variable big hit A" and the result of the big hit type determination. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result indicating that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable variable big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result and a large hit type determination result indicating that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable variable big hit".

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating stop (decision) of decoration symbol fluctuation in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low-probability low-base state, normal state) in which neither the time-saving control nor the probable change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time-saving control. This is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low-probability / high-base state, time-saving state) in which the probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which the time saving control is performed while the time saving control is not performed (the high accuracy low base state and the time saving no probability changing state), and the command 9503H is changed to the time saving control. This is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state in which the control is performed together (high-precision high-base state, time-saving accurate change state).

  The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening that notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a big hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state.

  In the big hit start specifying command and the big hit end specifying command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result specifying command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determining result. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. . The notification command during opening of the special winning opening and the notification command after opening of the special winning opening include, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of executions of the round (for example, “1” to “16”) in the state of the normal opening big hit and the short opening big hit. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 177SG6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 177SG4A has been established. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 177SG6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , A second starting port winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the first reserved storage display area 5D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the second reserved storage display area 5U or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition has been satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  FIG. 8-17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIGS. 8-17, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random pattern value Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4 for general-purpose display result determination is controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 updates various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), so that one of the random number values MR1 to MR4 is updated. Numerical data indicating a unit may be counted.

  The random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the fluctuation display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as a “big hit” to be in a big hit game state, for example, It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65536”. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of “probable variable jackpot A”, “probable variable jackpot B”, and “non-probable variable” when the variation display result is “big hit”. It is a random value, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example.

  The random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is a random value used to determine a variation pattern in a variation display of a special symbol or a decoration symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, “1” to “1”. 997 ”.

  The random number value MR4 for determining the general figure display result is used to determine whether the variation display result in the general figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is “per-normal figure hit” or “normal figure loss”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 8-18 shows a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment. In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively. In addition, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern.

  For the big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach A, super reach B, super reach C, and super reach D are executed. There is a fluctuation pattern. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to super reach, normal reach A, normal reach B,. , A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, five or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach E and super reach F may be provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 to 18, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of the normal reach is performed in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach such as super reach A to super reach D in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment is performed, the super reach effect of the super reach D is executed. The fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is set to be longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach C is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach B is executed, and the super reach A The special figure fluctuation time is set to be long in the order of the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect is executed.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, it is set such that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” in the order of super reach D, super reach C, super reach B, super reach A, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is increased. Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the expectation of big hits.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, and the like. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination beforehand, only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number for pattern type determination, the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  Note that the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach C and the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach D is performed in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment are both movable bodies 177SG 302L and 177SG 302R during the variable display. Is a variation pattern that moves (moves) from the origin position to the united position, but the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach C is executed may be selected only during the time saving control (high base). On the other hand, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of Super Reach D is executed is a variation pattern that may be selected regardless of whether the time saving control is being performed.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach C is a fluctuation pattern in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position to the union position while the push button 31B is operated, while the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is This is a variation pattern in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position toward the united position regardless of the operation of the push button 31B (see FIG. 8-28). In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach C is exemplified only when the variation pattern is selected during the time saving control (high base), but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a case may be provided where the fluctuation pattern of the super reach C is selected during the normal state (low base).

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when the fluctuation display is performed in the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach D is performed, the fluctuation display result is lost. In other words, when the fluctuation display is executed in the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach D is executed, the fluctuation display result is always a big hit. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the fluctuation display result is lost even when the fluctuation display is executed in the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach D is executed. .

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIGS. Table data and the like constituting a variation pattern table for storing types are stored.

  FIG. 8-19 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a separate display result determination table may be used for the first and second special maps.

  The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display apparatus 177SG4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display apparatus 177SG4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is referred to as “big hit” to determine whether or not to control the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table of the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state (low-probability state), or the probable change state (high-probability state). The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is used as a result of determining whether or not to control the special figure display result to "big hit" in the big hit game state. This is the determination data to be assigned. In the display result determination table of the feature portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is in the probable state (high-probability state), more determination values are present than in the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state). , "Big hit" are assigned to the special map display result. Thereby, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in the feature portion 177SG of the present embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a “big hit” and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (the present embodiment). The feature of the form is about 1/30 for 177SG). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high-precision state), the probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state is determined. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so as to be higher.

  FIG. 8-20 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The big hit type determination table of the feature portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when it is determined to control the special figure display result to "big hit" to the big hit gaming state, based on the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the big hit type It is a table that is referred to to determine one of a plurality of types. In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which the variable display (fluctuation) is performed in the special figure game is the first special figure (a special figure game by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A) or the second special figure (the second special figure). The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is “non-probable change”, “probable change big hit A”, “probable change big hit B” "Are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots.

  Here, the big hit type in the feature portion 177SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-20 (B). In the feature portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed to shift to the high-accuracy high-base state. A non-probable jackpot is set.

  As described above, in the jackpot game state of “probably variable jackpot A” and the jackpot game state of “non-probable jackpot”, the number of rounds for changing the special variable winning ball device 177SG7 to the first state advantageous to the player is 16 times (so-called). 16 rounds), a normal open jackpot repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit game state based on the “probable big hit B”, as described above, five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 177SG7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. It is a short-term open jackpot. Therefore, there is a case where “probably variable big hit A” is referred to as 16 round (16R) probability big hit and “probably variable big hit B” is called 5 round (5R) certain variable big hit.

  The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the big-hit jackpot A or the big-hit jackpot B have ended are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big-hit game state ends. Therefore, if the jackpot that has recurred is the jackpot jackpot A or the jackpot jackpot B, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It is a so-called connected state that occurs continuously.

  On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by the “non-probable variable jackpot” is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature portion 177SG of the present embodiment) or the predetermined figure game is executed. The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the number of special figure games is executed.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 8-20 (A), “probable variable big hit A” and “probable variable big hit B” depend on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Are different in the assignment of judgment values to the jackpot types. That is, when the fluctuation special map is the first special map, a determination value in a predetermined range (a value in a range of “81” to “100”) is assigned to the big hit type of “probable big hit B” with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probable change big hit B”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A being satisfied. And determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 177SG4B being satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “probably variable jackpot B” with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special map game using the second special map, it is not determined that the big hit type is “probably variable big hit B” and the state is controlled to the short open big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a gaming state in which game balls are easy to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which few prize balls are obtained and reduce the interest in the game. It can be prevented.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-20 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the "non-probable change" jackpot type is based on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The probability of a non-probabilistic big hit and the probability of a probable big hit are the same regardless of whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map. It has been.

  Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination value to “probably variable big hit B” is different depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Is also different depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probable variable big hit A" having a large number of rounds, the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure. Is set to be more easily determined in the case of.

  It should be noted that, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the fluctuation special map is the first special map is assigned to the big hit type of “probable variable big hit B”. You may. For example, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a smaller judgment value than when the fluctuation special map is the first special map may be assigned to the big hit type of “probable variable big hit B”. Alternatively, the big hit type may be determined with reference to the common table data regardless of whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map.

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the special pattern display result is set to "big hit", and the change pattern determination table for the big hit which is used when it is determined in advance, and the special figure display result is set to "losing". And a loss-variation-pattern determination table that is used when it is determined in advance that the action is to be performed.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach A jackpot (PB1-2), the variation pattern of the super reach B jackpot (PB1-3), and the super reach D For each variation pattern of the jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5), a predetermined random value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value. In the big hit change pattern determination table B, the normal reach big hit change pattern (PB1-1), the super reach A big hit change pattern (PB1-2), the super reach B big hit change pattern (PB1-3), the time reduction control , A predetermined random number in the range of the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each of the variation patterns of the super reach C jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4) corresponding to. In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when these determination values are “big probability big hit A” or “big probability big hit”, the super reach B is easily determined and the big hit type is In the case of "non-probable variable jackpot", the super reach A is assigned so as to be easily determined, and when the variation pattern of the super reach B is executed, "probable variable jackpot A" or "probable variable jackpot B" It is possible to increase the player's expectation that the game may be performed.

  The variation pattern determination table for loss is used when the number of retained storages is one or less, and the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used when the total number of retained storages is two to four. Loss variation pattern determination table B, Loss variation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8, and a case where the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed. And a variation pattern determination table D for losing used in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach A loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value in a range where the random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern can be assigned to the fluctuation pattern of B loss (PA2-3) is assigned as a judgment value. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range where a random pattern value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of A loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach B loss (PA2-3). ing. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range where a random pattern value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of A loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach B loss (PA2-3). ing. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach A loss variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time-saving control. PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B loss (PA2-3), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach C loss (PA2-4), a predetermined disturbance in the range that the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern can take. Numerical values are assigned as judgment values.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 to 18, the variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1) The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of the variation pattern (PA1-3). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, and the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of four. Sometimes, when the start winning is made, it becomes difficult to cause useless starting winning in which the holding memory is not made, and when the number of the holding memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the fluctuation time is long. By determining PA1-1), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time is lengthened.

  Next, an operation of the effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart illustrating an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 first clears the RAM area, sets various initial values, and initializes a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control. A first initialization process (177SGS050) and a second initialization process (177SGS051) for returning each movable body 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position and confirming the operation are performed, and the processes of S73 to S77 shown in FIG. 6 are performed. Run.

  Here, the second initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-22 and 8-23. FIG. 8-22 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 8A and 8B are explanatory diagrams showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, FIG. 8B is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the detection operation control, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a control speed.

  As shown in FIG. 8-22, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between an origin position (first position) and a combined position (second position), respectively. The forward operation to the (second position) and the returning operation from the united position to the origin position are performed by the effect control CPU 120 by executing the attraction effect object operation process and the attraction effect object storage process, which are performed by the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. This is an actual operation mode.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines that the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are not detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the second initialization process is executed, that is, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are not detected for some reason (for example, when the transport If it has moved from the home position at the time of installation on the gaming island, or if it has not been possible to return to the home position during the previous operation (for example, during the performance of an effect, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 (Such as when a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as not being able to confirm or return to the origin) occurs, or when the game machine moves from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine, etc.) Operation at non-detection in Fig.8-22 Such as the position indicated by a black circle corresponding to the control, when in position) between the home position and united position, perform a non-detection operation control for homing. When performing the non-detection operation control, since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are located at positions away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 toward the origin position.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes detection operation control when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the second initialization process is performed.

  For example, in order for the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 to be surely detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, the moving direction of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 from the time when the detected sections are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. In a case where a predetermined operable range (for example, play) is set before the operation is restricted, the origin is returned and the position is further shifted to the rear side than the position detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. May stop in position. Therefore, even when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, detection operation control for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 to more accurate origin positions is performed.

  In this detection-time operation control, it is necessary to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 to positions away from the origin position and then return to the origin position in order to temporarily release the detection state of the detection target by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Since it is not necessary to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the origin position to the detection operation position near the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the second initialization process, and then executes the actual operation check operation control. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same operation as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R (movable body effect described later).

  Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation check operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A), 8-23 (B) and 8-23 (C) are controlled by the effect control CPU 120 to set the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to operate. The speed is different from the actual operation speed of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, even if the same control speed is set in one moving section and another moving section between the origin position and the combined position, one moving section In the case where the mode is different between and the other moving section (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when the same moving section rises and falls, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. May actually be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, if there is a difference in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302L. , 177SG302R do not always have the same operating speed. When a plurality of movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated by a stepping motor having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, the size, weight, When there is a difference in the operation mode, the operation distance, the drive mechanism, and the like, the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer in the set actual operation check process data. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed such that after decelerating from the origin position, the vehicle is decelerated and stopped at the united position, and after accelerating from the united position, decelerated and stopped at the origin position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for confirming that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can operate normally, a speed priority mode (moving motor 177SG391L, A mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be moved at high speed (maximum speed) in place of the small torque of 177SG391R (see FIG. 8-27). Change. In other words, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R effect of each of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R, the minimum speed (low speed) as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed higher than the minimum speed. In order to control the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to operate at a speed within the range of (high speed), the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the minimum speed (low speed) are also set even when the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed. Control is performed such that each of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operates at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed higher than the minimum speed.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, and the control speeds are set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. Is set. In the following, when the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the minimum control speed, they operate at the minimum speed, and when the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the maximum control speed, they operate at the maximum speed. It will be described that it operates.

  Here, the control speed is set such that the operation speed of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R during acceleration and deceleration is the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the united position, the movable body 177SG302L, The detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 after the 177SG302R is surely decelerated.

  As shown in FIG. 8-23 (B), when effect control CPU 120 performs the operation control upon detection, it will be described later during a period of moving from the origin position to the united position and a period of moving from the united position to the origin position. A torque priority mode (a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved at a low speed (minimum speed) instead of a large torque of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R; see FIG. 8-27) is always the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control is performed so that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate at (first speed). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the maximum speed in the detection-time operation control as the first operation control is lower than or equal to the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment). In this case, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are always set based on the lowest control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so that the speed becomes the same as the lowest speed in the actual operation check operation control). Control to operate.

  In addition, in the case of the detection-time operation control, since the operation distance of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is shorter than that of the actual operation confirmation operation control, the operation speed at the time of acceleration in the actual operation confirmation operation control, that is, the high-speed operation is required. The movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R, or the like may be damaged by an impact when the detected portion cannot be reliably detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, or when the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R returns to the original position from a short distance and is restricted from moving. Therefore, the operation is controlled so as to operate at the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8C, when effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, during the period of moving from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the combined position to the origin position, In a torque priority mode (see FIGS. 8 to 27) described later, control is performed so as to always operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation check operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control is lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this embodiment). In the characteristic portion 177SG of the embodiment, the speed is always based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so as to be the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control). Control for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is performed.

  In this case, since it is unclear how far the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located from the origin position, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located near the origin position, the actual operation confirmation operation control is performed. If the movable body 177SG302L and 177SG302R return to the origin position when the movable body 177SG302L and the 177SG302R return to the origin position, if the movable body 177SG302L is operated at a high speed, the detected portion cannot be reliably detected by the movable body 177SG302L or the movable body 177SG302L from a short distance. , 177SG302R and 177SG302R may return to the origin position and the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R, etc. may be damaged by an impact when the movement is restricted. Therefore, control is performed to operate at the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 117SG of the present embodiment, in the second initialization process, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved at a high speed (maximum speed) instead of having a small torque of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. By executing the actual operation check operation control in the speed priority mode in which the actual operation check operation can be performed, the actual operation check operation control can be completed quickly.

  On the other hand, in the second initialization process, in the torque priority mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved at a low speed (minimum speed) instead of the torque of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R being large, the operation confirmation operation control and non-detection at the time of detection are performed. By executing the time operation control, it is possible to obtain a torque larger than the torque required for rotation when the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R move toward the origin position, and thus the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R move to the origin position. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be reliably moved to the origin position while preventing stopping without rotating on the way.

  FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display effect processing in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the respective values of the process timer, the fluctuation time timer, and the fluctuation control timer (177SGS301, 177SGS302, 177SGS303). The process timer, the fluctuation time timer, and the fluctuation control timer are values set in the variable display start setting process in FIG. 7 to execute the effect during the fluctuation display.

  In 177SG304, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has expired. If the process timer has expired, the process data is switched (177SGS305). That is, in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 7, the process timer is set by setting the next set process timer value in the process table set according to the variation pattern of the variation display to be executed. The operation is started again (177SGS306). Further, the control state of the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc. which are set next (177SGS307). On the other hand, when the process timer has not expired, an effect device (for effecting the effect) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) corresponding to the process timer. The control of (parts) is executed (177SGS308).

  After execution of 177SGS307 or 177SGS308, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process data being executed is the process data of super reach C, that is, whether or not the variation display is being performed in the variation pattern of super reach C. Is determined (177SGS310). If the process data being executed is not the process data of Super Reach C (177SGS310; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS321, and if the process data being executed is the process data of Super Reach C (177SGS310; Y), the movable body 177SG302L , 177SG 302R from the origin position to the union position is determined to be the timing to start accepting the operation of the push button 31B (177SGS 311).

  If it is the timing to start accepting the operation of the push button 31B (177SGS311; Y), the image display device 5 prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. Reference) (177SGS312), and proceeds to 177SGS313. If it is not the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (177SGS311; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS313 without executing the process of 177SGS312.

  In 177SGS313, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not push button 31B is in an operation acceptance period (177SGS313). When the operation of the push button 31B is being accepted (177SGS313; Y), a rendering role operation process for operating the role (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) based on the operation of the push button 31B is performed (177SGS314). ) Proceed to 177SGS320.

  In addition, when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is not during (177SGS313; N), it is determined whether or not it is the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B (177SGS315). If it is the timing to end accepting the operation of the push button 31B (177SGS315; Y), the display of the pushbutton operation promotion image 177SGZ1 on the image display device 5 is ended (177SGS316), and the accessory operation start flag described later is set. If yes, the accessory operation started flag is cleared (177SGS317), and the flow proceeds to 177SGS318.

  If it is not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B in 177SGS315 (177SGS315; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS318 without executing the processing of 177SGS316 and 177SGS317.

  Then, in 177SGS318, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation reception end timing of push button 31B has already elapsed (177SGS318). If the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B has not yet elapsed (177SGS318; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS321. Is ON, that is, whether or not the detected portion of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 (177SGS319).

  When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON (177SGS319; Y), the process proceeds to 177SGS321, and when the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is OFF (177SGS319; N), the accessory (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) is moved from the combined position to the origin position. (177SGS320), and the process proceeds to 177SGS321.

  In 177SGS321, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation control timer has expired (177SGS321). When the variation control timer is out of timer (177SGS321; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left-middle-right decorative pattern (30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative pattern. The image data of the to-be-displayed screen is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (177SGS322). In this way, in the image display device 5, the variation control of the decorative symbol is realized. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer (177SGS323).

  When the fluctuation control timer has not expired (177SGS321; N), after executing 177SGS323, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the fluctuation time timer has expired (177SGS324). If the variable time timer has expired, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (S173) (177SGS326). Even if the variable time timer has not expired, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (177SGS325; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for per special figure ( The value is updated to a value according to S173) (177SGS326). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not timer-out, control is transferred to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation designation command is received. Even in the case of reception, the variation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the normal variation time has elapsed (at the end of the variation of the special symbol).

  In the process table used for the variation control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the change time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of 177SGS304 has timed out, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the effect control of the decorative symbol based on the process table ends. I do.

  FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special-effects-object operation process in the variable-display effect process illustrated in FIG. 8-24. In the effect combination operation process, first, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not push button 31B has been operated (177SGS331). If the push button 31B is operated (177SGS331; Y), it is further determined whether or not the accessory operating flag indicating that the accessory (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) is operating is set (177SGS332). ). When the accessory operation flag is not set (177SGS332; N), it is determined whether or not the union detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, that is, whether or not the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the union position is completed. The determination is made (177SGS333).

  When the union detection sensor 177SG402 is ON (177SGS333; Y), the effect-of-principal object operation processing is ended, and when the union detection sensor 177SG402 is OFF (177SGS333; N), that is, to the union position of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. If the movement of the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R has been started based on the operation of the push button 31B at least once during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, the accessory operation started flag Is set (177SGS334).

  If the accessory operation started flag is not set (177SGS334; N), the output of the operation instruction in the speed priority mode to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is started (177SGS335). In addition, the accessory operation start flag and the accessory operation flag indicating that the accessory (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) is operating are set, and the presentation accessory operation process ends (177SGS336, 177SG337).

  As shown in FIGS. 8 to 27, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment reduce the torque in accordance with the operation instruction from the effect control CPU 120, while reducing the torque. A speed priority mode in which the 177SG302R can be moved at a high speed and with a low biasing force, and a torque priority mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be moved at a low speed and a high biasing force compared to the speed priority mode, while the torque is greater than in the speed priority mode. It can be driven in the mode and the mode.

  Returning to FIG. 8-25, if the accessory operation started flag is set in 177SGS334 (177SGS334; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, at least once. Indicates that the operation of the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is started based on the operation of the push button 31B, but the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is moved from the origin position because the operation of the push button 31B is not continuously executed. It is determined whether or not the vehicle has hardly moved (177SGS338).

  When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON (177SGS338; Y), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located near the origin position, that is, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate while moving from the origin position to the union position (FIG. 8-12 to 8-13), the output of the operation instruction in the speed priority mode to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is started (177SGS335). Then, the accessory operation started flag is set, and the process proceeds to 177SGS337 (177SGS336). On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is OFF (177SG338; N), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are separated from the origin position, that is, they rotate while moving from the origin position to the union position ( Based on the possibility that it is not possible to obtain a sufficient acceleration to perform the operation shown in FIGS. The process starts (177SGS339), sets the character-in-progress operation flag, and ends the processing of the special-effects-object operation (177SGS337).

  Also, when the accessory running flag is set in 177SGS332 (177SGS332; Y), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not combination detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, that is, the combination position of movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. It is determined whether or not the transfer to is completed (177SGS340). When the union detection sensor 177SG402 is OFF (177SGS340; N), the output of the operation instruction in the speed priority mode or the operation instruction in the torque priority mode to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is continued by terminating the attraction effect operation process. Subsequently, the operation of the movable bodies 177SGS302L and 177SGS302R is executed. If the union detection sensor 177SG402 is ON (177SGS340; Y), a stop instruction is output to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R to stop driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS342). The in-actor specialty operation flag is cleared (177SGS343), and the attraction effect operation processing ends.

  If there is no operation of the push button 31B in the 177SGS331 (177SGS331; N), it is determined whether or not the accessory operation flag is set (177SGS341). If the in-gear operation flag is set (177SGS341; Y), that is, if the operation of the push button 31B ends while the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operating, a stop instruction is issued to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. Is output, the driving of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is stopped (177SGS342), the in-progress operation flag is cleared (177SGS343), and the attraction effect operation process ends.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the combined position in the stage-effect working process, whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, Although the mode in which the drive modes for driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are made different based on the positions where the bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. In the process, the drive mode for driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is changed based on the number of times the push button 31B is operated during the operation reception period of the push button 31B (for example, the first operation of the push button 31B is performed). In this case, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode, and when the push button 31B is operated for the second time or later, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode. Good.

  FIG. 8-26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a production character storage process in the variable display production process shown in FIG. 8-24. In the attraction effect storing process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the attraction operation flag is set (177SGS351). When the accessory operation flag is set (177SGS351; Y), a stop instruction is output to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R to stop driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS370). The in-accessory flag is cleared (177SGS371), and the attraction effect storing process ends.

  In addition, when the accessory operation flag is not set (177SGS351; N), whether the accessory storage flag indicating that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operating toward the origin position is set. Is determined (177SGS352). When the accessory storage flag is not set (177SGS352; N), that is, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not yet operating toward the origin position, the storage of the accessory (movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R) (origin). It is determined whether it is during the period for starting the movement toward the position (177SGS353).

  If it is out of the period for starting the storage of the accessory (177SGS353; N), the process of storing the attraction is ended, and if it is during the period of starting the storage of the accessory (177SGS353; Y), the combination detection sensor 177SG402 is It is determined whether or not it is ON, that is, whether or not the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the union position (177SGS354). When the union detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, it is possible to obtain sufficient acceleration to rotate (see FIGS. 8-12 to 8-13) when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the union position to the origin position. Based on the fact that it is possible, an operation instruction in the speed priority mode is output to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS355), and the accessory storing flag is set, thereby ending the rendering accessory storage process (177SGS357).

  When the union detection sensor 177SG402 is OFF in 177SGS354 (177SGS354; N), since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the union position, they rotate when moving to the origin position (FIGS. 8 to 12). Based on the fact that it is not possible to obtain sufficient acceleration to perform the operation shown in FIG. 8-13), an operation instruction in the torque priority mode is output to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS356), and the accessory is being stored. The flag is set and the effect combination storing process ends (177SGS357).

  When the accessory storage flag is set in the 177SGS352 (177SGS352; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, to the origin positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. It is determined whether or not the movement has been completed (177SGS360). When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, when the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position is completed (177SGS360; Y), a stop instruction is output to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. The driving of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is stopped (177SGS361), the flag storing the accessory is cleared (177SGS362), and the effect combination storing process ends.

  When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is OFF, that is, when the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position is not completed (177SGS360; N), the effects of 177SGS361 and 177SGS362 are not performed. The object storing process ends.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 28, when performing the fluctuation display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach C, during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, When the player continuously operates (for example, long-presses) the push button 31B, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate (move) from the origin position toward the united position.

  Note that when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate toward the united position during the variation display in the variation pattern of the super reach C, the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is the initial operation (the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the origin positions). In the state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the origin position or the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. However, if re-operation is performed in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at positions different from the origin position (non-origin positions), the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode. It has become the jar.

  That is, when the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate toward the united position during the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach C, the driving of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode based on the operation of the push button 31B. When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move away from the origin position due to the movement (when the detected part of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R moves out of the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401), as shown in FIG. Since the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode based on the operation of the push button 31B again, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are combined from the origin position. Said operating unable rotation in developing moving towards the location (see FIG 8-12～ Figure 8-13) is prevented thereby stopped. Further, when the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R hardly operate from the origin position by the driving of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode based on the operation of the push button 31B (the detected portions of the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R detect the origin position). If the sensor 177SG401 does not move out of the detection range), the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are again operated in the speed priority mode based on the operation of the push button 31B again, as shown in FIG. So that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can obtain sufficient acceleration to rotate (see FIGS. 8-12 to 8-13) while moving from the origin position to the combined position. What To have.

  Then, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate toward the origin position during the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach C, the operation is related to the operation of the push button 31B as shown in FIG. That is, the control by the operation of the push button 31B is disabled. When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the united position (second position) when the operation is started, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode to start the operation. When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at positions (non-merged positions) different from the merged position (second position), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, the player or the like once operates the push button 31B and then operates the push button 31B again to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the combined position. Although the resuming mode is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. If the player or the like operates the push button 31B again during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, the push button If the period until the end timing of the operation reception period of 31B is longer than the period until the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the combined position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the combined position based on the operation of the push button 31B again. Not work towards It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the push button 31B is operated again while the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the origin positions, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are set to the speed priority mode. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the push button 31B is operated again, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R always moves the moving motor regardless of the origin position. The 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the torque priority mode. By doing in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 in the effect-of-effects material operation process, and to reduce the data capacity required for the effect-of-effects material operation process.

  On the other hand, in the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D, the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the origin position to the merging position and the movement from the merging position to the origin position are the same as the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach C. However, the operations are performed irrespective of the operation of the push button 31B, and the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are controlled by the speed priority as shown in FIG. It is driven in a mode. In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is set, the driving mode of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is executed regardless of the operation of the push button 31B. Since the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R do not stop during the operation, a single speed priority mode is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When moving from the union position to the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the advance speed priority mode. In the evacuation speed priority mode where the moving speed is different (for example, the moving speed is high) Rotating motor 177SG391L, it may be driven 177SG391R.

  Further, in the case of the variation pattern of the super reach D, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated regardless of the operation of the push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and Only the start of the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R may be executed in response to the operation of the push button 31B.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern for operating the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B is exemplified by the superreach D only, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B may be set to, for example, a normal reach variation pattern, or may be other than super reach D. It may be set as another super reach, for example, super reach E. As described above, when the variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B is also set to the variation pattern of the normal reach having a lower expectation, which is a big hit than the super reach D, The moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the normal reach speed priority mode in which the moving speed is different from the reach priority speed priority mode (for example, the moving speed is slow). Further, the speed priority mode of the super-reach D is also set when a super-reach E having a lower hit expectation than the super-reach D is set as a variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG 302L and 177SG 302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B. Alternatively, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in a super-reach E speed priority mode having a different moving speed (for example, a lower moving speed). That is, as the speed priority mode, a plurality of speed priority modes having different moving speeds are also provided, and the plurality of speed priority modes are defined as the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R (origin position, united position) and fluctuation patterns (big hit expectation). May be used according to the situation.

  In addition, in the production of the special effect in the feature portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated toward the origin position, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. Although there is a case where the drive is performed in the torque priority mode, the present invention is not limited to this. When performing the directing effect storing process to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position, The moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may always be driven in the torque priority mode. By doing so, for example, in the case where a power failure occurs during the operation of moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moving to the origin positions after the restoration of the power failure. Thus, the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be reliably moved to the origin position while preventing stopping without rotation (see FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13).

  Next, an example of a movable body effect by the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R of the effect device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-30 and FIG.

  For example, at a predetermined timing after the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern of the super reach C is started, and the reach is established and the super reach is developed, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. Thus, during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, the push button operation promotion image 177SGZ1 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (B), the effect control CPU 120 moves the moving body 177SG310 by the lifting / lowering motor 177SG305 based on the operation of the push button 31B during the operation reception period, so that the left and right The bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R simultaneously start moving from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position), and the rotating motor 177SG367 moves the rotating portion 177SG330B from the first projecting position to the housing position. The movable section 177SG330 changes from the first state to the second state.

  As shown in FIG. 8-30 (C), in the variation display based on the variation pattern of the super reach C, if the operation of the push button 31B is once released during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, the movable The movement of the bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position) is interrupted.

  Then, as illustrated in FIG. 8D, if the push button 31B is continuously operated or the operation of the push button 31B is restarted during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, the operation illustrated in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8D and FIG. 8E, the peripheral walls 177SG322E and 177SG322F of the guided member 177SG320 contact the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B, and the movable body 177SG310 moves while maintaining the contact state. Accordingly, the movable portion 177SG330 rotates about 180 degrees about the rotation shaft 177SG311 facing in the vertical direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8E, the left and right movable portions 177SG330, which are each inverted by about 180 degrees, come into contact with each other at the second position (combined position), and the rotating portion 177SG330B rotates. It stops at the second projecting position. Then, as shown in FIG. 8F, the effect control CPU 120 raises the movable rail 177SG 351 by the elevating motor 177 SG 305 so that the movable portion 177 SG 330 moves up with respect to the base 177 SG 331 and the image display device 5. The effect image 177SGZ2 is displayed around the movable portion 177SG330 on the display screen of FIG. Thereafter, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are returned from the second position to the first position, and the decorative pattern is derived and displayed on the image display device 5 in a big hit combination. If the variation pattern of the variation display is a variation pattern of the super reach C loss, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to just before the second position shown in FIG. Then, the decorative pattern may be derived and displayed on the image display device 5 in a combination of losing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the first position (origin position) separated from each other, the front cover 177SG333 and the frame cover 177SG370L of the left movable body 177SG302L. Forms a first left rendering part simulating the right half of the airplane, and the first right simulating the left half of the airplane by the front cover 177SG333 of the right movable body 177SG302R and the frame cover 177SG370R. A production part is formed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8E and FIG. By combining the rear cover 177SG334 of the movable body 177SG302R and the left and right side of the movable body 177SG302R, a second effect part simulating the entire airplane is formed.

  As described above, at the first position, the first left rendering section and the first right rendering section are constituted by the front surfaces of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R and the frame covers 177SG370L and 177SG370R, and at the second position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302L are formed. A second effect part different from the first effect part is constituted by the back surface of the 177SG302R. More specifically, the first left directing section and the first right directing section are directing sections capable of specifying about ／ of the body of the airplane, while the second directing section is a directing section capable of specifying the entire body of the airplane. is there.

  That is, in the first position, a part of the first left production part and the part of the first right production part which are separately provided at the left and right positions move and unite to form one second production part. It can be surprising. Further, when the size of the airplane that is the second production unit is larger than the size of the airplane that is the first left production unit and the first right production unit, more unexpectedness can be given.

  Also, for example, when the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 8-30 (A) is being performed, the movable body 177SG338F is turned on, and the light-transmitting lens portions 177SG340F, 177SG371L, and 177SG371R emit light, whereby the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are emitted. When the effect that suggests moving is performed, or when the left and right movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are united as shown in FIG. By doing so, a definite effect for notifying the big hit may be performed. Further, as a notice effect indicating that there is a possibility that the super reach effect as shown in FIGS. A movable body effect such as reciprocating movement between a first position and a position before the third position may be made executable.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the first position, the movable LED 177SG338F is turned on to emit light from the light-transmitting lens portions 177SG340F, 177SG371L and 177SG371R. Thus, the sense of unity between the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R and the frame covers 177SG370L, 177SG370R can be improved, while the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R move from the first position to the second position, and the frame cover 177SG370L. When the movable LED 177SG338F is turned off when it is separated from the 177SG370R, the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R and the frame covers 177SG370L, 177SG37 are turned off. It can be the R inconspicuous that they are separated.

  In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is started, and when the reach is established, the reach effect of the super reach D is started on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (B) and FIG. 8-31 (C), the moving body 177SG310 is moved by the lifting / lowering motor 177SG305 based on the progress of the reach effect of the super reach D, so that the left-right movable The bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R simultaneously start moving from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position), and the rotating motor 177SG367 moves the rotating portion 177SG330B from the first projecting position to the housing position. The movable section 177SG330 changes from the first state to the second state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8D, the reach effect of the super reach D is further executed, so that the peripheral walls 177SG322E and 177SG322F of the guided member 177SG320 contact the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B, and the contact By moving the moving body 177SG310 while maintaining the state, the movable portion 177SG330 rotates about 180 degrees about the rotation axis 177SG311 that faces in the vertical direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (E), the left and right movable portions 177SG330, which are each inverted by about 180 degrees, come into contact with each other at the second position (combined position), and the rotating portion 177SG330B rotates. It stops at the second projecting position. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (F), the effect control CPU 120 raises the movable rail 177SG 351 by the elevating motor 177SG 305, so that the movable portion 177 SG 330 moves up with respect to the base 177 SG 331, and the image display device 5 The effect image 177SGZ2 is displayed around the movable portion 177SG330 on the display screen of FIG. Thereafter, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are returned from the second position to the first position, and the decorative pattern is derived and displayed on the image display device 5 in a big hit combination.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the original position (first position) to the combined position (first position) by the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the super-reach C reach effect. 2) can be executed, and when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin positions, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are operated. When the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is operated at high speed and with low urging force by driving in the speed priority mode, while the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is not arranged at the origin position. , Move Motor 177SG391L, movable body 177SG302L by driving the 177SG391R by the torque priority mode, by operating the 177SG302R at low speed and Takazuke force, thereby improving the presentation effect of the movable body effect.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which a movable body effect can be executed by operating the push button 31B of the player during the reach effect of the super reach C is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited thereto, and the movable body effect may be executable by the player operating the operation means (for example, the stick controller 31A or the like) other than the push button 31B during the reach effect of the super reach C.

  In addition, as the movable body effect, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin positions, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are directed to the combined position at high speed and with low urging force. While the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not located at the origin position, that is, the operation of the push button 31B is released after the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R have once started moving toward the combined position. When the push button 31B is operated again after the stop and the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the combined position is resumed, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the combined position at low speed and high urging force. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are first moved from the origin position to the combined position, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are restarted toward the combined position. , 177SG302R, the effect of the movable body effect can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 (C) to 8-30 (D), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the united position (second position). As a result, unexpectedness can be given to the movable body effect, so that the entertainment interest of the movable body effect can be improved.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, a form in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position) is exemplified as the movable body effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R during the production of the movable bodies deform or emit light in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the united position (second position). Alternatively, it may move in a direction other than the united position, or may simply move from the origin position to the united position.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, if the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 in the second initialization processing (177SGS051), non-detection is performed. After the time operation control is executed, the actual operation checking operation is executed by driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode, and the origin detection sensor 177SG401 detects the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. In this case, after the detection-time operation control is executed, the actual operation check operation is executed by driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. That is, the movable body 1 is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Regarding the 7SG302L and 177SG302R, the actual operation checking operation is performed by driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode regardless of whether or not the detected portion of the 7SG302L is detected. Can be simplified.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-28, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the origin position (first position) during the super-reach C reach effect ( In the case of executing the evacuation operation in the present invention), the driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are changed according to the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R when the evacuation operation is started, that is, the evacuation operation is started. Although the mode in which the operation modes of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are changed according to the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at the time of performing the operation is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. Under reach direction of reach C When moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position (first position) (when executing the retreat operation in the present invention), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (first position). (The two positions) (when the advance operation in the present invention is executed), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are directed toward the origin position (first position) according to the drive mode of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. The drive modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R when moving are made different (that is, depending on the speed of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the combined position. Body 177SG302L, movable body 177SG302L when moving toward the origin position from 該合 body position 177SG302R, may be a different order) as the speed of 177SG302R.

  Further, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the origin position (first position) during the reach effect of the super reach C (when the retreat operation in the present invention is executed), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin position. Regardless of the driving mode of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R when the moving is performed from the (first position) to the united position (second position) (when the advance operation in the present invention is performed), the moving motor 177SG391L is always used. , 177SG 391R are driven in the speed priority mode (that is, when moving the movable bodies 177SG 302L, 177SG 302R toward the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG 302L, 177SG 302R are always moved at high speed and with low urging force). There. By doing so, the process of moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position (first position) can be simplified.

  Further, effect device 177SG300 in characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment includes contacting bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B in addition to movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, and movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R have their origin positions (first positions). When contacting the contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B at the third position on the way from the united position (second position) or the combined position (second position) to the origin position (first position) from the united position By moving the guided member 177SG320 about 180 degrees by moving to the right or left while maintaining the state, the direction (posture) is changed from forward (first posture) to backward (second posture). That is, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move. Since the orientation is changed by reluctant rotated, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the movable body effect.

  As described above, the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will be described. include.

  For example, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the advantage (for example, the big hit probability) for the player is constant in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 177SG-2, a setting unit capable of setting one set value from a plurality of set values is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting unit sets the set value. The degree of advantage (for example, big hit probability) for the player may be changed according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process (see FIG. 5), the CPU 103 selects a display result determination table in which the range of the determination value (MR1) assigned to the jackpot differs according to the set value, What is necessary is just to determine whether the variable display result is a big hit.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the setting value can be set as described above, the CPU 103 can change the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on condition that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. What is necessary is just to be able to control to a state (change permission state).

  In this way, when the CPU 103 enables the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be able to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the change permission state on condition that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as a modification 177SG-3, the effect control CPU 120 The non-detection operation control or the like may be performed by executing the second initialization process (FIGS. 8-21) in the change permission state. By doing so, when the change is permitted, the non-detection operation control for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position (the first position) is executed, which hinders the work of changing the set value. Can be prevented.

  When the CPU 103 can control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in a change permission state on condition that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as a modification 177SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, if the CPU 103 does not control the change to the permission state, the non-detection operation control is performed by executing the second initialization process (FIG. 8-21). In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and the CPU 103 controls the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in the change permission state, the second initialization process (FIG. 8-21) is not executed and the non-detection operation control is not executed. It may be. By doing so, the non-detection operation of returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position (the first position) is not executed in the change permission state, which hinders the work of changing the set value. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the setting value can be set as described above, as a modification 177SG-3, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 103 sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the set value. The effect control CPU 120 executes the second initialization process (see FIG. 8-21) to perform non-detection automatic control, detection-time operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation. What is necessary is just to perform control.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is performed during the reach effect of the super reach C, the detected portion of the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R when the player operates the push button 31B again. In this case, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed-priority mode as long as they are not out of the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the player operates the push button 31B again when performing the movable body effect during the reach effect of the above, whether the detected portion of the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is out of the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Regardless of the movement motor 177SG3 1L, may be allowed to drive at the always torque priority mode 177SG391R. That is, in this case, by moving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the torque priority mode, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position) with a low speed and high urging force. Therefore, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is set to be longer than the period during which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the origin position (first position) to the united position (second position) with a low speed and high urging force. It is desirable to do.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the embodiment, when the movable body effect is performed during the super-reach C reach effect, the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin positions (first positions) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R according to whether or not the detected portion of the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when moving from the to the combined position (second position). Although the drive modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are different from each other, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R may be located between the origin position and the combined position. Detected part can be detected When the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) to the united position (second position) in response to the operation of the push button 31B, the sensor is used to move the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R. The drive modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be made different depending on whether or not the detected portion is detected.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the embodiment, when the movable body effect is performed during the super-reach C reach effect, the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin positions (first positions) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R according to whether or not the detected portion of the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when moving from the to the combined position (second position). Although the driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are different from each other, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are combined from the origin position (first position). Position (second position) When the push button 31B is operated again during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, the movement motor 177SG391L, The drive mode of the 177SG391R may be made different.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when performing the movable body effect during the reach effect of the super reach C, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin positions (in accordance with the long press operation of the push button 31B). Although the form in which the movable body is moved from the first position) to the united position (second position) is illustrated, when the movable body effect is performed, the push button 31B is repeatedly struck or the stick controller 31A is moved in a plurality of directions. The movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R may be moved from the origin position (first position) to the united position (second position) in response to an operation (so-called leverage). When performing the movable body effect in this way, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (first position) in accordance with the continuous tapping of the push button 31B or the operation of the stick controller 31A in a plurality of directions. When moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position), the number of times the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A are operated is determined. When the operation period and the like are measured and the push button 31B is operated again during the movable body effect period, the drive mode of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be changed according to the number of operations and the operation period. .

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the embodiment, when the movable body effect is performed during the super-reach C reach effect, the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin positions (first positions) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R according to whether or not the detected portion of the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when moving from the to the combined position (second position). The driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are different, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a sensor capable of detecting the rotation angle of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is provided. By the sensor Movable body 177SG302L, movable body 177SG302L depending on whether or not the determination result is rotating in 177SG302R, moving motor 177SG391L for moving the 177SG302R, may be made different driving modes 177SG391R.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the embodiment, when the movable body effect is performed during the super-reach C reach effect, the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin positions (first positions) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R according to whether or not the detected portion of the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when moving from the to the combined position (second position). The driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are different from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the proximity of the guided member 177SG320 to the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B. Can be detected And a moving motor 177SG391L, 177SG391R for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R according to the determination result of whether or not the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are close to the contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B by the sensors. May be made different.

  That is, in the “first situation” and the “second situation” in the present invention, the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, such as the characteristic portion 177SG of the embodiment, are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. In addition to the presence or absence, the number of operations and the operation period of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R between the origin position (first position) and the combined position (second position), and the movable body 177SG302L , 177SG302R are rotating, and whether or not the guided member 177SG320 is close to the contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B.

  Further, in the feature portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when performing the movable body effect during the reach effect of the super reach C, when the operation of the push button 31B is received, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. If the detected portion is not detected, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are driven in the torque priority mode so that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are directed to the combined position (second position). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode for a predetermined period during the production of the movable body. That is, after obtaining a force for surely rotating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the united position (second position), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. You may do so. By doing so, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be reliably and quickly moved to the combined position.

  Further, in the feature portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when performing the movable body effect during the reach effect of the super reach C, when the operation of the push button 31B is received, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. It is determined whether or not the detected portion is detected, and the driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are made different according to the determination result. Is not limited to this. When only one of the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the operation of the push button 31B is received, The other After moving the other movable body to the origin position by driving the movement motor corresponding to the body in the torque priority mode, the movable body 177SG302L is driven by driving both movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. , 177SG302R may be moved from the origin position to the united position. Further, by driving the moving motor corresponding to the one movable body in the speed priority mode, the one movable body is moved from the origin position toward the united position, and the moving motor corresponding to the other movable body is moved. The other movable body may be moved from the origin position to the united position by driving the motor in the torque priority mode.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, two movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are provided, and these movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated in the movable body effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the number of movable bodies that operate in the movable body effect may be one or three or more.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the movable body effect is executed during the fluctuation display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body effect is performed during the big hit game. It may be executed as an effect notifying that the game is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the jackpot game or an effect notifying that the jackpot game is a jackpot game of 16 lands.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the movable members 177SG302L and 177SG302R complete the movement from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position) during the variable display, the variable display result is a big hit. In other words, the form in which the movable body effect is executed as a jackpot notification effect is exemplified.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body effect is a chance-up effect or the like during the fluctuation display. It may be executed as an effect other than the jackpot information effect during the variable display, such as a development information effect that informs the user of developing into a super-reach reach effect.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the detected portion of the movable body 177SG302L or 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 as the moving body effect during the reach effect of the super reach C, the push button is pressed. When the operation of the base 31B is received, it is determined whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, and the movement for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R according to the determination result. The driving modes of the motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are made different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG39 according to the operation period of the push button 31B. Varying the R drive mode, i.e., the movable member 177SG302L in accordance with the operation period of the push button 31B, the moving velocity toward the united position of 177SG302R may be different.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, the drive mode of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is exemplified by two drive modes, a speed priority mode and a torque priority mode, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the speed priority mode may be a plurality of high-speed, medium-speed, and low-speed speed priority modes, or the torque-priority mode may be a plurality of high-, medium-, and low-torque torque priority modes. The plurality of speed priority modes and the plurality of torque priority modes may be appropriately used depending on the situation. For example, at the time of movement from the origin position based on the first operation of the push button 31B, the medium speed priority mode is set, and when the movement is from the origin position but is not the movement by the first operation of the push button 31B, Alternatively, a low-speed speed priority mode may be set, and a high-speed speed priority mode may be used when moving from the united position. The torque priority mode is also a high torque torque priority mode at the start of the operation in the re-operation by the re-operation of the push button 31B, and from the time when the moving speed reaches the first speed after the operation is started, the medium torque torque priority mode. In addition, the low-torque torque priority mode may be set when the moving speed reaches the second speed.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the above embodiment, the first operation mode of the present invention is a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated at high speed and low torque in the speed priority mode (high-speed low-torque operation mode). The second operation mode of the present invention is an example in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated at low speed and high torque in the torque priority mode (low-speed high-torque operation mode). Are not limited to these differences in speed and torque, but include differences in the distance over which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate, differences in the degree of change in the moving speed and changes in the changing position (change patterns), and differences in the moving speed. The difference in the ratio of the distance between the fast part and the slow part, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 It may be a rotary or differences, etc. of the presence or absence of the extension of the rotation unit 177SG330B.

  In other words, when the operating distance of the movable body is different depending on the effect, that is, when the first situation and the second situation are different in the effect, and the operating distance of the movable body is different depending on the effect, the moving distance (effect The operation mode may be different according to the above. For example, when the movable body moves for a short distance, the driving mode is set to a low speed so that the player can recognize the movement, and when the movable body moves for a long distance, in order to prevent extension during the performance. The high-speed mode is used when the effect is enhanced by using a high-speed drive mode, or conversely, when the movable body vibrates by repeatedly moving a short distance. While emphasizing that it is vibrating, when the movable body is repeatedly operated at a longer distance than the repetitive operation, in order to prevent the movable body from being damaged by inertial force, a low-speed mode is set. Is also good.

  Further, even when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are stopped due to an interruption or an error while moving to the united position, the operation mode of the movable body after the stop is changed to the operation mode before the stop (for example, , Speed priority mode) (for example, torque priority mode).

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the embodiment, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R serving as the movable body of the present invention is illustrated as being provided on the game board 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the movable body may be provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so that the player can touch the movable body. In this case, contact between the movable body and the player is prevented. It is preferable from the viewpoint of protection of the player to provide a sensor or the like for detecting and to provide a safety function for stopping the operation of the movable body when contact between the movable body and the player occurs. As described above, when the movable body is stopped by the safety function, the operation mode of the movable body after the stop is different from the operation mode before the stop (for example, the high-speed mode) (for example, low mode). May be used as the mode).

  Further, as a movable body provided in the gaming machine frame 3, for example, in a movable body projecting upward or obliquely upward of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation of the player is interrupted during the projecting operation. Thus, even when the movable body stops, the operation mode of the movable body after the stop may be different from the operation mode before the stop.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value, Can be started, and the variation display result is derived on a display device capable of varying display of a plurality of types of symbols each of which is identifiable, whereby one game is ended, and the variation display result derived on the display device becomes The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated accordingly.

  The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other exemplary embodiments described below.

  Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications, and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiments and each of the modifications, all or some of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are merely examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above and the following description, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  Other gaming machines of the present invention include gaming machines capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machines 1) and detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's operation. ), A movable body operably provided (for example, the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R), and the detection unit performs the operation of the player for a predetermined period during the valid period (for example, the operation reception period of the push button 31B). Based on the detection, the specific effect execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control, which can execute a specific effect (for example, a movable object effect) for operating the movable body in conjunction with the operation of the player, as shown in FIG. -24 for performing the variable display effect processing shown in -24), wherein the specific effect execution means transmits to the detection means when in the first situation. When the movement of the player is detected, the movable body is operated in the first operation mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 28, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin positions. When the push button 31B is operated in a state in which the movable body 177SG 391L, 177SG 391R is driven in the speed priority mode, the movable bodies 177SG 302L, 177SG 302R operate at high speed and with low torque. If the player's operation is detected by the detection means when the second situation is different from the second situation, the movable body is operated in the second operation mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. The push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not located at the origin positions. In this case, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode to operate the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at a low speed. Further, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) that suggests that the control is performed in a controlled manner, and title notification means (for example, an effect) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The control CPU 120), and the title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIG. 9-2 (F) as shown in the title of the reach effect), The effect execution means can execute at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. A part displaying the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the super reach D).

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be improved. In addition, since the notification of the title according to the suggested effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine in which the effect is improved, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) that suggests that the control is performed in a controlled manner, and title notification means (for example, an effect) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The control CPU 120), and the title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIG. 9-2 (F), a part for displaying the title of the reach effect), the suggestion effect execution means includes at least a first suggestion effect (eg, For example, a super-reach A or super-reach B reach effect and a second suggestive effect (for example, a super-reach D or super reach E reach effect) can be executed. The title corresponding to the second suggestion effect is notified from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), the super reach D starts from the start of the reach effect of super reach D). (A part displaying the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect) a gaming machine. Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, the characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described. Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1, PA1 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode but the display result is "losing". -2. The display results are "big hits" such as reach loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". Are prepared. PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability when each reach is executed (big hit reliability) is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 9-1 (B), normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach Reach B <Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 9-1 (A) are the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 9-1 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves to a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of the reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by the effect device of the reach with the higher reliability than the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively instigated, and the production effect can be improved. The notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9B and FIG. 9C are diagrams illustrating an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” is stopped and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and a reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super-reach effect is started, such as when the introduction portion of the super-reach effect (also referred to as super-reach effect) ends, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of super reach A (here, the character of "SP reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound (here, "super reach A") corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, the character 31AK003 as the enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is performed, the subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a friendly character wins, a big hit occurs, and if the friendly character loses, a loss occurs.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Also, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the introduction portion of the super reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. (Here, “SP Reach B”) is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, so that the Super Reach B title is displayed. Be informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, the character 31AK006 as the enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is performed, the subsequent part of the reach effect of the super reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, and the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, super reach A (FIG. 9-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 9-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) In the introduction part before the title is announced, super-reach production is performed in a common production mode (FIG. 9-2 (C)). In this way, the player can be noticed which super-reach is to be made since the super-reach effect is started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced. At least one super-reach can be determined by watching the production, for example. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introductory part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8, thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  It should be noted that the notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the expectation degree of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 9-2 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 9-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. You may.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach reach of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is performed. Be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. Then, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in Super Reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the super reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach effect, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Also, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation suggestion indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, the effect can be prevented from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  Note that the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 9-2 (H) and the like, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. May be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (H) and the like, when the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars can be displayed, and the number of levels of expectation may be increased. .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. In the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a later-described determined effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case in order to improve the effect.

  Note that, here, the effect of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, but for example, a title notification or an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decided production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is “losing”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), a determined effect of displaying the image 31AK012 on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 9C, and as shown in FIG. A definitive decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and the variable display is executed. The way of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, when the character display which is resident during the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile communication are displayed on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the super-reach reach effect so as to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the extended effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is executed (the title notification of super reach D is executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, when the game reaches the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the title of the super reach A is announced, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 9D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and a Reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. As illustrated in FIG. 9D, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), but may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (indicating failure). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as a performance in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured to display a black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation indicator 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 9-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, such as glowing, as shown in FIG. 9F. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect has ended.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-5 (A) to (F), black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the degree of expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more items may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be raised by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 9-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion production in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 9-5 (A) to 9 (F), title notification and expectation degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-5 (G). At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. The expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 9-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, as shown in FIG. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 9-5 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is designated. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), other reach productions (title notification, expected degree) (Including a suggestion effect) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the effect according to the preference of the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation indication display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. May be executed in such a manner that the number of displays suggesting is gradually reduced. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to, or instead of, the expectation effect effect of the present embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, in the case where the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the title of Super Reach D is announced, and after the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-6 (B). An extended effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 9C, the title 31AK032 of super reach C (here, the character of “SP reach C”) is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 9A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach A is displayed. Is notified, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 9-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) is changed is executed, after the title display mode has been changed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect, in which the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of increasing the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 9-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute a title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 9A, for example, according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing". As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), the display color of the super reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and from “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change and those that change from “red” to “fruit pattern” are provided, and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). In other words, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the title display color changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  The “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. In the case where the display color changes, the display color only needs to change after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-7. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be made different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined in the normal mode at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9A, and as shown in FIG. 9-9B in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line, etc.) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute a speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-9 (C) according to whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect includes “white”, “red”, and a color that changes from “white” to “red”, in this order (ascending order). ) Has increased the jackpot reliability. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, if the same announcement mode is achieved, the big hit reliability may be increased. In addition, the big hit reliability may be made different by a combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to focus attention on the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialog may be determined at a different rate from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, in place of the dialogue announcement, an announcement effect for notifying the jackpot reliability based on a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other notice effects and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination process ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, the title advance notice and the dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of the super reach, but in the case of the specific super reach (for example, other than the super reach with low reliability), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of dialogue notices may be made executable. In addition, although the title notice and the speech notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-9, the determination ratio is arbitrary. For example, even if the determination ratio is changed according to the type of super reach, Good. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result regarding the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the speech notice changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the effect and the effect of the line notice (the ratio of the effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) the effect changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a line in accordance with the effect content of the reach effect (for example, an effect of a character or an effect in a battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or housed. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the image display device 5 notifies the title, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the expectation degree suggestion display. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information relating to other effects (notice of mainly displaying characters). You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission ("Let's reach at 7", "Eliminate enemies using a stick controller", etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to title notification of a mission.

(Modified Example 31AK-1 of Characteristic Part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, the determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and thereafter, the display result is displayed ( FIG. 9-3 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect prompting operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is displayed in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 9-10 and 9-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect operation in the modification 31AK-1 in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. After reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), the character 31AK041 as the ally character and the character as the enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (C)-(F) and FIGS. 9-11 (G)-(I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Thereby, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. The big hit reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), and as shown in FIG. 9-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in the modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Thereafter, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 9-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is moved to the center portion as shown in FIG. 9-11 (K). Is displayed, and a display urging the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-11 (L). Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 9-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In the modification 31AK-1, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The reliability of the big hit in the case of being done is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the expectation of the player is improved. Can be maintained.

  9-10 and 9-11, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIGS. 9-10 and 9-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination of the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the effect effect or not, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 9-8.

(Modified Example 31AK-2 of Characteristic Part 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability and displayed with a plurality of types of elements included in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title of red characters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When the shutter display and the reach title display are performed, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notifies the game effect lamp 9 by emitting light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 9-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the left display of the left symbol and the right display of the right symbol are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, at the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed at the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "Battle Reach" indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is performed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after the common sound is output, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the hit reliability is high, such as "hot hot". Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. In addition, although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 9E is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character "BATTLE WIN!" Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen using the original numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 9F, all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. This makes it possible to suitably display the fruit pattern image in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thus, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 9-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 9-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 9A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 9D are displayed at different timings. In this way, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination relating to the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be performed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 9-8. In that case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. 9-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. In addition, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 9-8 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10A is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board (gauge) constituting a gaming board surface. Board) 2 and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 207 SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting and firing device and driven into the game area. In the gaming machine frame 207SG003, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door opening position for opening the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 centering on the left side and a door closing position for closing the front surface. The game area is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a. When the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  The gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting and unlocking a door key (not shown) owned by a clerk or the like of the game arcade, and players other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the left side of the image display device 5 in the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is formed in a left gaming area 207SG002L in which a game ball can flow down. 2, the right side of the image display device 5 is formed in a right game area 207SG002R in which a game ball can flow down.

  The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left hit) by operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by operation of the hit ball operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a game ball hit more strongly (right-handed) than a game ball flowing down through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 flows down.

  In the left game area 207SG002L, the general winning opening 10 is arranged, and in the right game area 207SG002R, from the upstream to the downstream of the right game area 207SG002R, the pass gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, the general The winning opening 10 and the special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game balls flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can enter the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball apparatus 6A, and the game balls flowing down the right game area 207SG002R are variable. The second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 10 and the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 formed by the winning ball device 6B can be won, and can pass through the passage gate 41.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, game balls flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot enter the second start winning opening or the special winning opening, and game balls flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot enter the first start winning opening. Has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-7, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 207SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 207SG051 for switching to a set value change state in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value, and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk or the like of a game arcade can check the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value check state). ).

  The setting switch main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switch 207SG052, is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that the device can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

  Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the game machine with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 closed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003 by using it. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade, so that only a store clerk having the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. The lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation to be described later with a setting key. Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but these may be shared by one key.

  Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is disposed on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged above the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged on the front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is a front view when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is A first special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing the variable display of one special figure, a second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing the variable display of the second special figure, and a first reserved display capable of displaying the first reserved storage number. 207SG025A, a second hold display 207SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved storage number, a normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of displaying a variable display of the normal symbol, a general symbol display 207SG025C capable of displaying the number of ordinary symbol storage, A round display 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, a high base state (hour saving state) and a big hit A right-handed lamp 207SG132 that is lit in a gaming state in which a game ball such as a gaming state is launched toward the right gaming area 207SG002R, a probable lamp 207SG133 that is lit in a probable state, and a time-saving lamp 207SG134 that is lit in a high base state (time-saving state). A game information display unit 207SG200 arranged collectively is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, each of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is configured by an LED of 8 segments. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variation display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variation display result can be derived and displayed in a common combination. ing.

  In the case where the fluctuation display result is a big hit in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A displays the fluctuation display result with two types of big hit symbols (lighted LED combinations) for each big hit type. Derivation display is possible. Further, in the case where the fluctuation display result is a big hit in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B displays the fluctuation display with two types of big hit symbols (lighted LED combinations) for each big hit type. Result and derived display are available.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B have different jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. At least a part of the big hit symbol derivable and displayable with the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be overlapped.

  As shown in FIG. 10-5, each of the first reservation display 207SG025A and the second reservation display 207SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In the first hold display unit 207SG025A and the second hold display unit 207SG025B, if the number of storages to be held is one, only the LED at the left end is turned on. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up sequentially. Then, every time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the hold storage. (In the section 207SG, the left direction).

  In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure hold storage is executed with priority. It is like. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 10-6, for example, when there is one first special figure reservation memory and two second special figure reservation memories (only the left end LED of the first reservation display 207SG025A). Is lit, and the two left LEDs of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the execution of the variable display based on the second special figure hold storage results in zero second special figure hold storage. After that, the fluctuation display based on the first special figure reservation storage is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the round display 207SG131 includes five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, there are provided three jackpot types, a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 5-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. In addition, which of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is turned on differs depending on the type of the big hit.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  Note that the effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can be operated between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display and the like. An origin detection sensor 207SG331 that can detect that one movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and a second movable body 207SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. Is connected to the origin detection sensor 207SG332 which can detect that.

  FIG. 10-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the result of determining whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit”, or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types of the jackpot is to be used when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the stop (decision) of the decorative symbol change in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left,” “middle,” and “right” on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the generated error (abnormal). In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to be generated on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening and the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The first start symbol winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. , A second starting port winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition has been satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that a setting value change operation has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in a setting value changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying that a setting value confirmation operation has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up in the setting value confirmation state). The command E106H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the operation of checking the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103. It comprises a random number circuit 104 for performing, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing the program read from the ROM 101. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes and temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-9, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the ordinary figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 10-9. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 10-10 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the fluctuation display result is “losing”, the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is “big hit”. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 10, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is performed in the characteristic portion 207 SG of the present embodiment is the super reach variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β. It is set shorter than. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is performed, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is performed is The special figure change time is set longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set so that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” so that the big hit expectation becomes higher. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time is, the higher the expectation of big hit is.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into the types of the fluctuation patterns, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, and the type of super reach. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination beforehand, only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number for pattern type determination, the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-10, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern becomes the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. If the set value is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and the non-reach is lost, the variation pattern may be such that the pseudo continuous production is executed three times and the super reach is lost.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 10-11 to FIG. 10-13 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11 and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 10A, a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. The display result determination table shown in FIG. 10C (set value 3), the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10A (set value 4), and the display result determination table shown in FIG. Set value 5), display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 10-12 (C), big hit type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), FIG. 10-13 ( B) In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in B), a big hit variation pattern determination table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a loss variation pattern determination table, a general figure display result determination table (not shown), a general figure Contains such dynamic pattern determination table (not shown).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, a jackpot winning probability (a winning rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value. . The set value is made up of six steps from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the set value is the largest value 6 which is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the more advantageous value for the game arcade side Become.

  FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and FIGS. 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a separate display result determination table may be used for the first and second special maps.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and FIGS. 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C), in each of the display result determination tables, the game state is a probable change state ( More judgment values are assigned to the special map display result of “big hit” when in the “high accuracy state” than in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). Thereby, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/260 when the set value is 3, (1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the setting value is 5, and 1/200 when the setting value is 6) Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, and 1/180 when the setting value is 3). 160, 1/140 when setting value is 4, setting If it is 5 1/120, 1/100 in the case of setting value of 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high-accuracy state), the probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is determined, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be the small hitting game state and controlled to the small hitting game state is the same. Have been. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) to FIG. 10-11 (C) and FIG. 10-12 (A) to FIG. 10-12 (C), The probability that it is determined that the special map display result is controlled to the small hitting game state by setting the small hit to “small hit” is set to 1/200. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the form in which the special figure display result is determined to be the “small hit” regardless of the set value and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is the same probability is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is set to “small hit” and controlled to the small hitting game state may be made different according to the set value.

  Further, as described above, in each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be the "big hit" and the control to the big hit game state is determined. The determination value is assigned such that the lower the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that it is determined that the special map display result is set to the "big hit" and the state is controlled to the big hit game state is increased (big hit probability: set value 6> set value 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and sets the value of MR1 in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and FIG. 10-12. If any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in (A) to FIG. 10-12 (C) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is set to the big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Also, MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and FIGS. 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C). Then, it is determined that a small hit is made for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and FIGS. 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and a small hit. Indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means to determine whether or not to control to a small hit gaming state. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 displays the display results shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and FIGS. 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C). The judgment table is used to judge whether to make a big hit or a small hit. However, a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are separately provided for each set value, and whether the variable display result is a big hit is determined. No, it may be determined individually whether to make a small hit.

  In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

  FIGS. 10-13 (A) and 10-13 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among them, FIG. 10-13 (A) determines the big hit type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. FIG. 10-13 (B) determines the jackpot type by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table in case.

  The big hit type determination table indicates that the big hit type is one of the big hit A to the big hit C based on the hit type determining random number (MR2) when the change display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine.

  Here, the big hit type in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as the big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-probable variable big hit) in which only the time-saving control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends to shift to the low-probability high-base state, After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and a big hit B or a big hit C (also referred to as a large-variable big hit) which shifts to the high-precision high-base state is set.

  The jackpot game state by the "big hit A" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called ten rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time-saving control executed after the big hitting game state by the "big hit A" is executed by executing a predetermined number of special figure games (100 times in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment), or The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the figure game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high-precision control and the time-saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big hit game state is ended. Therefore, when the jackpot that has recurred is the jackpot B or the jackpot C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. , A so-called extended-villa state.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, a mode in which three types of big hits A to big hit C are provided as big hit types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is two. You may provide less than the kind, or four or more kinds.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10A, in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “4”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “5”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the big hit B. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 is assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the big hits B and big hits C in which both the positive hit control and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2,. The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the big hit B. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 159 is assigned to the big hit B. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “4”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the big hit B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “5”, in the range of the determination value of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the big hit B. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “6”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (No judgment value is assigned to the big hit B).

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the big hits B and big hits C in which both the positive hit control and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2,. The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In the case where the determination rate of the jackpot type is different depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, a case where the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different depending on the set value set, so that the gaming interest can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random value for big hit type determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be made using MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous to the player (the bigger the jackpot probability is, and the bigger the big hit C as the big hit type is easily determined). Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the big hit probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the gaming property itself does not change. The present invention is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a gaming property in which the probability loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 during the big hit game. On the other hand, the game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to the certain change state, while the ratio of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure (so-called V). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during the high base (during the time reduction control). Ball is specially variable A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gaming characteristics are the same, but the jackpot probability and the hitting probability are larger than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the small hit probability is high while the number of prize balls obtainable during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6) may be provided. .

  Furthermore, when changing the playability in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). Used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (the game state is changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch, It may be used as a switch for controlling to a big hit gaming state).

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and the variation display result is “small hit”. A variation pattern determination table for a big hit that is used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for a loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “losed” is prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 10-15 (A) and FIG. 10-15 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table (big jackpot A ) And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance. A) and the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) include the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and the super reach β big hit For each of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a part of the range where the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take A constant random value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 10-15 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, one of the determination value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 is set. To 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the superreach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per β big hit. When the set value is “2”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 380 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach large hit, and 381 to 835 Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 836 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 361 to 820 Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 821 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 340 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 341 to 805 Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is “5”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 321 to 790 Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 791 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range of MR3 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 301 to 775. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 776 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 10-15 (B), in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the judgment value range of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 551 to 997 are assigned to It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 181 to 510 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation patterns 511 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 160 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 161 to 470 are determined. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 141 to 430 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and 431 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 121 to 390 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of 391 to 997 is allocated to the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “6”, 1 to 100 out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 101 to 350 The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit.

  As described above, when the jackpot A is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. Higher and higher in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In addition, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. The ratio is higher than the ratio and decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may determine that “big hit B” or “big hit C” may be obtained. Expectations can be increased.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is determined. Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even when the set value is any of 1 to 6, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. The variation pattern of the small hit may be determined at a different ratio from the plurality of variation patterns with the set values 1 to 6.

  Further, the loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A that is used when the number of stored games is one or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time saving control, and a low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern of β loss (PA2-3) is assigned as the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach, which correspond to the total number of stored storages of 2 to 4, respectively. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), in the loss variation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-medium sum pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 Are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach that correspond to the total number of stored memories of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 10-16 (C), in the loss variation pattern determination table C (for five or more low-base medium combined pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control. PA2-2) and a variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in FIG. 10D, in the loss variation pattern determination table D (for high-base medium use), when the set value is “1”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. Loss variation patterns (PA2-2) are assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to super reach β loss variation patterns (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).
When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

  As described above, when the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the rate at which the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is determined is higher than the rate at which the super reach variation pattern is determined, and the rate at which the normal reach variation pattern is determined. Are set to be lower in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the variation values of 701 to 900 among the determination values are the variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and the variation values of 901 to 997 are the variation of the super reach β loss regardless of the variation pattern determination table. If the fluctuation display result is lost, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss as the variation pattern for the loss are completely the same between each set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are different between each set value. May differ by a small difference (for example, about 1%).

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the form in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is lost, the super reach α The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value that is set.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although an example is shown in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the set value, the change ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, an example in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern is different depending on the set value is illustrated. Depending on the set value that is set, there may be one or more variation patterns that are not determined among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes the determination of the percentage.

  The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation of the non-reach loss is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The variation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, and the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of four. Sometimes, when the start winning is made, it becomes difficult to cause useless starting winning in which the holding memory is not made, and when the number of the holding memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the fluctuation time is long. By determining PA1-1), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time is lengthened.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (A) to 10-16 (C), the variation is determined by using the loss variation Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined using a different loss pattern determination table depending on the number of stored special symbols and the variation display of the second special symbol (in the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the variation pattern of the super reach loss The range of random numbers assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the losing probability are different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the super-reach losing variation pattern (the super-reach losing variation pattern) (Appearance rate) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the rate at which the fluctuation display is performed in the super reach loss fluctuation pattern differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display shows the fluctuation of the super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed in a pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10B may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is retained for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special figure holding storage unit, a general figure holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, a game control counter, and the like. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

  The first special figure holding storage unit stores a special figure which has not yet started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has been generated. The hold data of the game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the first start winning opening and establishes the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for fluctuation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on The storage is performed until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure game is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The second special map holding storage unit stores a special winning start (second starting winning) when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but the starting has not yet started. It stores the pending data of the figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). As an example, the second special map holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the second starting winning opening and establishes the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). The random number value MR1 for fluctuation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general figure holding storage unit stores the hold information of the general figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which the game balls passed through the pass gate, and based on the passing of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 on the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

  As illustrated in FIG. 10A, the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. Each of the first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E is made up of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in a very short cycle.

  Note that the display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the non-test target area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 when testing the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

  As shown in FIGS. 10-17 (B) and 10-17 (C), the display monitor 207SG029 displays the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability low-base state) for every 6000 balls out of all game states. Base L which is a (real-time value during measurement), Base 1 which is a base value calculated in a normal state (low-probability low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability low-base state) for every second 6000 balls, and normal state (low-probability low-base state) for every third 6000 balls in all game states And the base value 3 calculated as the base value can be displayed. The base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 in percentage.

  When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “L.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B to display “bL.” Which is an abbreviation of the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b." Is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display "b1." Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b.” Is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “2.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B to display “b2.” Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b.” Is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “3.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B to display “b3.” Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

  In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 is executed by control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 19, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display on the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. Note that the display of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 has a different display color according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “4”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value set to “5” is “5”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If you set value is "6" displays the base value in the display monitor 207SG029 at purple. For this reason, the clerk at the amusement arcade can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the set value changing process described later. ing.

  Next, a game control main process in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (207SGSa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6, that is, whether a normal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

  If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value changing process described later was being executed before the power interruption (that the power interruption occurred during the execution of the set value changing process) is set. Is determined (207SGSa006). When the set value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and when the set value changing flag is not set, a RAM clear flag indicating that a RAM clear process described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

  If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), RAM clear processing for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

  In 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started while the lock switch 207SG051 is ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (207SGSa013a).

  If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the CPU executes a set value change process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, proceeds to 207SGSa014, and proceeds to 207SGSa014. Is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

  If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or if the release sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

  In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag has been set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 has been cleared at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 this time (RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) has been executed) ( 207 SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is set to stop power supply (power interruption). A recovery process is performed to return to the state (207SGSa015).

  In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (started by hot start) in a state before the power interruption, transmits a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

  Further, in 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal set value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in accordance with a formal procedure by an operation of an amusement arcade employee or the like (the pachinko gaming machine 207SG003 is opened, and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on and the clear switch is operated while operating the pachinko gaming machine). When the device 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processing of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above is executed.

  If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and if the release sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

  Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start and transmits a restoration command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. The notification of the cold start is started by starting the blinking (207SGSa024).

  After the execution of 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has expired (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not out of the timer (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSa026 is repeatedly executed. Is stopped (207SGSa027), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa028.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked during the cold start notification timer period (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

  Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and instructs the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). The register of the built-in CTC is set (207SGSa029), and the interruption is permitted (207SGSa030). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  In addition, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 sends an instruction to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), the fact that the CPU 103 has returned from a power cut during the setting change described later, and the like. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by one (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has expired (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not expired (207SGSa034; N), the processing of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 is repeatedly executed. When the error notification execution waiting timer has expired (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are used to notify the occurrence of a setting value abnormality error or to recover from a power interruption during setting change (error notification). , "E." is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game arcade via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the game console, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the power interruption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by an operation of a clerk of the game arcade), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B perform error notification.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment displays the display monitor 207SG029 and the first monitor 207SG029 when the abnormal set value is set or the power returns from the power cut during the change of the set value. The error notification is performed by the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, so that the clerk of the game arcade can generate an error and set values from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that it has recovered from the power interruption during the change. In addition, since the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the return from the power interruption during the change of the set value can be recognized by the management device of the gaming arcade, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Has become.

  In the game control main process of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. In the RAM clear processing, it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008. This may be executed not only after the setting (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but also when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y). .

  FIG. 10-21 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, “00H” is set (stored) at the designated address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag. It is determined whether or not it is (207SGSa45).

  If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next Then, the process proceeds to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear processing ends.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area of the RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). At other addresses (after F003), game information including special figure hold storage, general figure hold storage, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored. . The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among other areas in which other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating a factory shipping state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started while the value indicating the factory shipping state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, The pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process may be prompted to be restarted by a display on the display device 5 or the like.

  That is, the RAM clear processing in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is processing of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing “00H” in an address excluding the set value.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, an example in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear processing is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the game is started at the start, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (after the address F003 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag may be stored in the game control microcomputer. By storing them in 100 registers (for example, any of an accumulator that is the center of operation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, and a general-purpose register), the process of storing and reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted. Alternatively, the processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. Can be prevented from being overwritten by the information (data).

  FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing a setting value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value changing process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold display. The blinking of the second hold indicator 207SG025A and 207SG025B is started (207SGSa052, see FIG. 10-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 sets only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode according to the set value change process (a mode other than the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C shown in FIG. 10-6). Is started (207SGSa052a).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as the setting value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as a set value in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Is set (the set value is reset to “1”), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value of 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

  In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power-off detection process execution start wait timer for waiting until the power-off detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by one (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has expired (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection processing execution start waiting timer has not expired (207SGSa056; N), the processing of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 is repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection processing execution wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y). Executes a power-off detection process (207SGSa057).

  After the execution of the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa059).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting change switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062). If the setting switch 207SG052 has not been operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. If the setting switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 in the RAM 102 is determined based on the operation of the setting switch 207SG052. The content is updated (207SGSa063).

  Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a setting value that is one step more advantageous for the player than “1”, is set as the temporary setting value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is “2”, “3” which is one step more advantageous for the player than “2” is temporarily set. A value larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 by, for example, storing the set value at the address F001 of the RAM 102 is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process for displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or the temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. Is completed (207SGSa067), and all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary setting value is stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. If the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), It is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored at the address F000 is different from the value of the temporary set value stored at the address F001 (207SGSa070).

  If the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is the same as the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, where it is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. If the set value stored in the address F001 is different from the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is stored in the address F000. It stores (207SGSa071) and proceeds to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

  FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the first hold display. The blinking of the second hold indicator 207SG025B and 207SG025A is started (207SGSa102, see FIG. 10-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 sets only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode according to the set value confirmation process (a mode other than the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C shown in FIG. 10-6). Is started (207SGSa103).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power-off detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power-off detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by one (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has expired (207SGSa107). If the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer has not expired (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and if the power-off detection process execution wait timer has expired (207SGSa107; Y). Executes a power-off detection process (207SGSa108). The power-off detection processing (207SGSa108) is the same processing as the power-off detection processing (207SGSa057) of the setting value change processing described above.

  After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game arcade (207SGSa110).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set values on the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. Are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa 115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

  As described above, the lighting of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B, and the round display device 207SG131 from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, and the first hold display device 207SG025A, By starting blinking of the hold display 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, the player or the clerk of the game hall can change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or change the set value. It is possible to recognize that it is under confirmation.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing, as a mode corresponding to the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing, one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG 131 Although only one LED is illuminated, the present invention is not limited to this. The lighting patterns of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are the big hit A, the big hit shown in FIG. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as the mode does not correspond to any of B and big hit C.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), at the start of the set value change process or the set value check process, a mode corresponding to the set value change process or the set value check process As an example, a case is described in which the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are lit in the same manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 may have a set value change. Lighting may be performed in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut off) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is opened with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opened. The setting value change processing is executed by turning ON the clear switch and the clear switch.

  At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (A) to 10-25 (E), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit are turned off by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value illustrated in FIGS. 10 to 17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display units when executing the set value changing process at the time of startup and when displaying the base value after the startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the setting change switch 207SG052 is operated in a state where the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off once (power cut off) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opened. By setting the (clear switch OFF), the set value confirmation processing is executed.

  At this time, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (A), 10-25 (B) and 10-25 (E), the display monitor 207SG029 turns off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to perform the first operation. The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value illustrated in FIGS. 10 to 17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses a different number of display units when executing the set value confirmation process at the time of startup and when displaying the base value after the startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

  FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart illustrating the power interruption detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from a power supply board (not shown) (207SGS081). If there is no power-off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process is terminated. Then, the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  In the game control timer interrupt process in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the CPU 103 executes the same power-off detection process (207SGS200) as the above-described 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. Thereafter, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

  Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

  FIG. 10-29 is a flowchart showing the production control main processing executed by the production control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by one (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has expired (207SGS405). If the command reception waiting timer has expired (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the command reception waiting timer expires.

  When the command reception waiting timer has expired (207SGS405; Y), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from the power cut, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information is input in a player information input process described later). After receiving the input of the information, the information (information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  If no hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a cold notification command has been received (207SGS408). If the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, (Information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) is cleared (207SGS409), and it is notified that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared and that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 on the image display device 5 are cleared). The display of the notification image 207SG005M1), the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the clerk of the game hall that has started the pachinko gaming machine 1 For example, it is only necessary to be able to notify that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the execution of the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  If no cold start notification command has been received (207SGS408; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the change of the set value is performed. A setting value related notification process for executing notification that the operation is being performed (setting value changing notification) and notification of the setting value being confirmed (setting value checking notification) is executed (207SGS412).

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as the notification during the change of the set value or the notification during the confirmation of the set value, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (B) and 10-36 (C), , A notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the set value is being changed or a notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the set value is being checked, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the set value changed state or the set value confirmed state. In general, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, and a clerk of a game arcade or the like who changes or checks a set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in the state of doing. In other words, the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a store clerk or the like at the game hall where the set value is changed or confirmed. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot judge from the display of the image display device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. Therefore, as the notification during the change of the set value or the notification during the confirmation of the set value, the pachinko game machine is used to notify the salesclerk of the game hall of changing or confirming the set value by outputting sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R and emitting the game effect lamp 9. It may be notified that 1 is operating in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 performs first movable body initialization processing (207SGS413) for checking the operation of first movable body 207SG321, and second movable body initialization for performing the operation check of second movable body 207SG322. The processing (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. (See FIGS. 10-35).

  Here, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34. FIG. 10-33 is a schematic explanatory view showing an operation mode of the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 10A to 34C are explanatory diagrams illustrating a control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a control speed in the non-detection operation control.

  The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between respective origin positions (first positions) and rendering positions (second positions). The forward operation to the second position) and the return operation from the effect position to the origin position are the actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during the variable display.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines that the detected portions of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are performed, If the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 move for some reason (for example, if they have moved from the home position during transportation or installation on a gaming island, or if they were unable to return to the home position during the previous operation (for example, when the The movable body 207 SG 321, 207 SG 322 has a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as not being able to confirm the home position return or being unable to operate due to a key, a failure, a stuck, or the like, or has moved from the home position due to the vibration of the gaming machine. Depending on the position other than the home position. (For example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position, such as a position indicated by a black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 10-22), the non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed. I do. When performing the non-detection operation control, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 toward the origin position.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the non-detection operation control in the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, or detects the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If it is, the actual operation check operation control is executed. The actual operation check operation control is the same operation as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

  Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speed shown in FIGS. 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B) is a control speed set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322. , 207SG322 differs from the actual operation speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set in one moving section and another moving section between the origin position and the rendering position, one moving section In the case where the mode is different between the moving section and another moving section (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when moving up and down in the same moving section, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are used. May actually be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there is a difference in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, , 207SG322 are not always the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by the same performance stepping motor, even if the same control speed is set for each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, When there is a difference in the operation mode, the operation distance, the drive mechanism, and the like, the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 10-34 (A), when effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer in the set actual operation check process data. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed such that after accelerating from the origin position, decelerate and stop at the rendering position, and accelerate after decelerating from the rendering position and stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the rendering position. Change in order from high speed to low speed. That is, when performing the effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the effect control CPU 120 performs the lowest speed (low speed) as the first speed and the highest speed (high speed) as the second speed higher than the lowest speed. In order to control each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 to operate at a speed within the range described above, even when executing the actual operation check operation control, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the minimum speed Is controlled so that each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 operates at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the fast second speed.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are set so as to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operation speeds. Is set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, they operate at the lowest speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, they operate at the maximum speed. It will be described that it operates.

  Here, the control speed is set so that the operating speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration becomes the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the rendering position, the movable body 207SG321 and the movable body 207SG321 are controlled by controlling the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control for a longer time than when stopping at the rendering position. After the 207 SG 322 is surely decelerated, the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensors 207 SG 331 and 207 SG 332.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (B), when effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, during the period of moving from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the production position to the origin position, as shown in FIG. , So as to always operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation check operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control is lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this embodiment). In the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the speed is always based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so that the speed becomes the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control). Control for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is performed.

  In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located from the origin position, if the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, the actual operation confirmation operation control When the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is returned to the origin position when the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 returns to the origin position, the detected part cannot be reliably detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG321, 207SG332, or the movable body can be moved from a short distance. The movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 and the like may be damaged by an impact when the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin positions and are restricted, so that the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 operate at the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control.

  Returning to FIG. 10-29, after execution of the first movable body initialization processing (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization processing (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. Then, it is determined whether or not the set value early change end flag indicating that the change of the set value or the check of the set value has been completed is set (207SGS415). If the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y). Goes to 207SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the process of 207SGS416.

  In 207SGS417, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of first movable body 207SG321 has been completed (207SGS417). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 has not been completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set, the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If there is (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412. If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change end. It is determined whether the flag is set (207SGS420).

  In 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) which is the same process as 207SGS413. ) And a second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) which is the same process as the 207SGS414, and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), the 207SGS414, and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) are performed first. It is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) proceeds to 207SGS427.

  As described above, regarding the processing of these 207 SG 412 to 207 SG 424, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (A), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command (pachinko At the time when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), the set value change notification and the set value confirmation notification are started, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are performed. Execute As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the second movable body initialization processing is executed after the first movable body initialization processing ends, that is, the first movable body 207SG321 After the operation check, an operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (A), after the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are completed, the effect control CPU 120 issues a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification. When the command is received, that is, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization processing is performed again. The second movable body initialization processing is executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (B), effect control is performed at a timing when only the first movable body initialization processing is completed among the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing. When the CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has been completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed. If the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in a state where there is no change, after the second movable body initialization processing is completed, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are executed again. It has become.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command at a timing when the first movable body initialization processing has not been completed yet. In other words, if the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in a state where the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has not been completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body Only the initialization processing is executed, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed again.

  In the case where the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command are not received in 207SGS411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command is received (207SGS425). . If an error designation command has been received (207SGS425; Y), an error notification process (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed, and if no error designation command has been received (207SGS425; N). , 207SGS403.

  In addition, as the error notification in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (D), the image display device 5 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command. Good.

  As described above, in the effect control main process in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, the player information (the player information While the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc., after receiving the input from the RAM 122 are cleared, while the production information (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reachs, etc. since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) ) And set value information (any numerical value of “1” to “6” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is already stored in the RAM 122. Overwrite (update and store) the existing setting value information.

  That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a set value confirmation state, or a set value change state. I have.

  Then, in 207 SGS 427, effect control CPU 120 specifies which of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, and a setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, and the image display device 5 performs the reception. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the command that has been performed is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-31, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as an initial symbol. When the received command is the set value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "from the left as an initial symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of decorative symbols is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 6 ") that is advantageous to the player is When set, a decorative pattern is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as an initial symbol at a higher ratio than when a setting value (for example, "1") disadvantageous to the player is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that a setting value that is advantageous for the player is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 6 ") that is advantageous for the player is provided. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between the case where the setting is set and the case where the setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, “1”) is set. Further, when the setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, “6”) is set and when the setting value that is disadvantageous for the player (for example, “1”) is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be varied.

  Returning to FIG. 10-29, effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the look-ahead restriction counter in order to regulate the execution of the prefetch notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). Thereafter, effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag has been set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes a startup notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (207SGS431). In the start notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If this is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined which of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command has been received. A start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and a start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start-up notification process timer is started, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-up notification process timer and the start-up notification process table by executing the start-up notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. The notification may be executed.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, or a set value confirmation end notification command. The mode of the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on whether there is any.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-32, when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received when starting up the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value is not set, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds are executed. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  Also, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and outputs the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. It should be noted that the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  In other words, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Output of the output sound A, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and output sound for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. Performing the output of B includes both.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated and receives the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Of the output sound C, and display of a message image (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value has been completed) for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 is executed. It should be noted that the emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the setting value change end notification command is received. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. Differently, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is described in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a management computer of a game arcade or a counter for each unit, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As an activation notification at the time of the activation, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, a device that executes the start notification even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts in any of the hot start, the cold start, the setting change state, and the setting confirmation state is partially common. Although a certain form (in which light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the device is started in a start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal is output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device. It may be, or the like) that.

  In addition, the notification mode of each device that executes the start notification may be made different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are turned on, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In this case, only some of the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may emit light.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers), and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the gaming machine frame 207 SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound output from all speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting is being changed,” while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, in the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, a terminal for outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (the time until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is used as the setting value change notification. During the period, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change to the management device, and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is commonly used for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be made different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the start-up notification processing, the form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. In addition, the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which any of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, and a setting value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this. Among the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

  Further, in the feature portion 207SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a start notification in a different mode is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 Has been described as an example in which the decorative patterns of different combinations are displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received at the time of activating, but the present invention is not limited to this. The modes of the start notification and the combination of the decorative symbols may all be different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part thereof may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start, activated by a cold start, activated by a setting change state, or activated by a setting confirmation state. Also, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 10-29, next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a power-off detection process (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIGS. 10-37, first, effect control CPU 120 receives a power-off signal from a power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (207SGS441). If there is no input of the power-off signal (207SGS441; N), the process is terminated, and if there is an input of the power-off signal (207SGS441; Y), the set value information and player information stored in the RAM 122 are deleted. The backup data included is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process proceeds to a loop process in which none of the processes is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Returning to FIG. 10-29, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis processing, effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 10-8) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an effect control process (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process (207SGS435) for updating the count value of a counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, a player information input process for accepting input of player information (207SGS436), A player information output process of outputting player information (207SGS437), and an effect information totaling process of summing effect information (207SGS438) are executed. After that, the process shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429).

  In the player information input processing, the effect control CPU 120 operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player to set a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and can receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of large hits, the number of super reach, and the like as player information stored each time the fluctuation display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and generates the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player can read the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smartphone and transmit the player information totalized in the current game to an external server, thereby obtaining a pachinko gaming machine. 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time a variable display, a big hit game, or a super reach is executed. I do.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10-38, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). If the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451; Y), after executing the look-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is performed according to the effect control process flag. Perform the above processing.

  If the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is any one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is “0” or any one of “2” to “7” (207SGS452; N), any one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. When the processing is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is decremented by 1 (207SGS453), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) are performed according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7). By executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after startup, the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby displaying the variable display four times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated, based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated. 5), the execution of the prefetch notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, based on the state in which the game can be played in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution of the prefetch notice effect is controlled over four variable displays. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the game has become possible, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, The light amount of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set to the state at the time of factory shipment.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), the effect control CPU 120 performs super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestive effect, The super-reach C or super-reach D can be executed as the second suggestion effect, and the super-reach C or super-reach D can be executed when the super-reach C or super-reach D reach operation is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect can be improved.

This embodiment also includes the following invention 207SG. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, so that the setting state cannot be appropriately notified. There was a problem. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine described in Means 1 of Invention 207SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Section 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting value of the setting unit is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process illustrated in FIG. 10-22).
When the setting state is set, the information display unit performs a display for recognizing the setting state (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 10-27 (A), the CPU 103 is performing the setting value changing process). In the case of, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on.
According to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit is in the setting state in the information display unit in which the variable display which is an important display in the gaming machine is executed. Information can be given.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in Means 2 of Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Section 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch is OFF when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). Into a confirmation state (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 10-23),
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit performs a display for recognizing the confirmation state (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 10-27 (A), the CPU 103 is performing the setting value confirmation processing). In the case of, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on.
According to this feature, the gaming machine is notified that the confirmation state is being displayed on the information display unit on which the variable display that is an important display is executed in the gaming machine. Information can be given.

Further, as a gaming machine described in Means A of Invention 207SG for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Section 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting value of the setting unit is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process illustrated in FIG. 10-22).
When the setting state is set, the information display unit performs a display for recognizing the setting state (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 10-27 (A), the CPU 103 is performing the setting value changing process). In the case of, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on),
further,
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of the player;
A movable body operably provided (eg, a movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R);
The movable body is operated in conjunction with the operation of the player based on the fact that the detection means detects the operation of the player over a predetermined period during the valid period (for example, the operation reception period of the push button 31B). Specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 8-24) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a movable body effect) to be performed;
With
The specific effect execution means,
If the detection means detects the player's movement in the first situation, the movable body is operated in the first operation mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. When the push button 31B is operated in a state where the 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin positions, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are driven at high speed and with low torque by driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. Part to operate),
In the case where the operation of the player is detected by the detection means in the second situation different from the first situation, the movable body is operated in the second operation mode (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not located at the origin positions, the movable motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode to thereby move the movable bodies 177SG302L. , 177SG302R operating at low speed)
According to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit is in the setting state in the information display unit in which the variable display which is an important display in the gaming machine is executed. Information can be given. In addition, the effect of production can be improved.

In addition, based on the fact that the operation of the player has been detected for a predetermined period by the detecting means during the valid period, the set value is suggested by a specific effect mode in which the movable body is operated in conjunction with the operation of the player. You may do so. For example, each time the operation of the player is detected for a predetermined period during the valid period, the first operation mode or the second operation mode is selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and the setting is performed according to the set value. By making the selection ratio of each operation mode of the first operation mode or the selection ratio of each operation mode of the second operation mode different, the more the set value is more advantageous to the player, the more the specific type of operation mode The operation is easily performed (for example, as the set value is more advantageous to the player, the operation is performed in an operation mode in which the speed is higher and the torque is lower in the plurality of first operation modes, and the plurality of In the two operation modes, the ratio of operation in the operation mode in which the speed is lower and the torque is higher may be higher). By doing so, the operation mode of the movable body is rich in change, and the opportunity to estimate the set value based on the appearance ratio of each operation mode can be given to the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.
Further, based on the fact that the operation of the player is detected over a predetermined period by the detection means during the valid period, when performing a specific effect of operating the movable body in conjunction with the operation of the player, the effect display device A setting value suggestion effect may be performed by the (image display device 5). For example, when performing a specific effect, a character is displayed on the effect display device, and the character is selected from among a plurality of types by lottery or the like each time the specific effect is performed. In such a case, the effect of the specific type of character in the specific effect may be more easily performed as the set value is more advantageous for the player. By doing so, if a specific effect is executed, a set value suggestion effect will be performed, so that the gaming interest can be further improved.

Further, as a gaming machine described in Means B of Invention 207SG for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Section 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch is OFF when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). Into a confirmation state (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 10-23),
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit performs a display for recognizing the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), the CPU 103 is performing the setting value confirmation processing). In the case of, a portion for lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B),
further,
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of the player;
A movable body operably provided (eg, a movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R);
The movable body is operated in conjunction with the operation of the player based on the fact that the detection means detects the operation of the player over a predetermined period during the valid period (for example, the operation reception period of the push button 31B). Specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 8-24) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a movable body effect) to be performed;
With
The specific effect execution means,
If the detection means detects the player's movement in the first situation, the movable body is operated in the first operation mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. When the push button 31B is operated in a state where the 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin positions, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are driven at high speed and with low torque by driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. Part to operate),
In the case where the operation of the player is detected by the detection means in the second situation different from the first situation, the movable body is operated in the second operation mode (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not located at the origin positions, the movable motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode to thereby move the movable bodies 177SG302L. , 177SG302R operating at low speed)
According to this feature, the gaming machine is notified that the confirmation state is being displayed on the information display unit on which the variable display that is an important display is executed in the gaming machine. Information can be given. In addition, the effect of production can be improved.

In addition, based on the fact that the operation of the player has been detected for a predetermined period by the detecting means during the valid period, the set value is suggested by a specific effect mode in which the movable body is operated in conjunction with the operation of the player. You may do so. For example, each time the operation of the player is detected for a predetermined period during the valid period, the first operation mode or the second operation mode is selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and the setting is performed according to the set value. By making the selection ratio of each operation mode of the first operation mode or the selection ratio of each operation mode of the second operation mode different, the more the set value is more advantageous to the player, the more the specific type of operation mode The operation is easily performed (for example, as the set value is more advantageous to the player, the operation is performed in an operation mode in which the speed is higher and the torque is lower in the plurality of first operation modes, and the plurality of In the two operation modes, the ratio of operation in the operation mode in which the speed is lower and the torque is higher may be higher). By doing so, the operation mode of the movable body is rich in change, and the opportunity to estimate the set value based on the appearance ratio of each operation mode can be given to the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.
Further, based on the fact that the operation of the player is detected over a predetermined period by the detection means during the valid period, when performing a specific effect of operating the movable body in conjunction with the operation of the player, the effect display device A setting value suggestion effect may be performed by the (image display device 5). For example, when performing a specific effect, a character is displayed on the effect display device, and the character is selected from among a plurality of types by lottery or the like each time the specific effect is performed. In such a case, the effect of the specific type of character in the specific effect may be more easily performed as the set value is more advantageous for the player. By doing so, if a specific effect is executed, a set value suggestion effect will be performed, so that the gaming interest can be further improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 3 of Invention 207SG,
The display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-27). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed are: Different parts)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 207SG,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, the variable display unit performs a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). A part for lighting all the segments constituting the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be performed on the variable display unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 5 of Invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is configured by a plurality of small display units that can be turned on independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each configured by eight segments. Part),
As a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state, a display in which all the small display portions are turned on is performed (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is used). The part that lights up all the segments that compose)
According to this feature, the gaming machine can be easily recognized as being in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 6 of Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a game by emitting game media to a gaming area (for example, the left gaming area 207SG002L and the right gaming area 207SG002R),
The information display unit includes a launch direction notifying unit (for example, a right-handed ramp 207SG132) that notifies a launch direction of a game medium in the gaming area,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, the launch direction notifying unit performs a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 10-27 (A), A part for blinking the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform a suitable notification in the launch direction notifying unit.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in Means 7 of Invention 207SG,
A suspension storage unit (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) capable of storing information relating to the variable display as suspension information;
The information display unit includes a suspension display unit (for example, a first suspension display 207SG025A and a second suspension display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a suspension display corresponding to the suspension storage stored in the suspension storage unit,
When in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), (In the value change state or the set value confirmation state, a part for blinking all segments constituting the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be performed on the hold display unit.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in Means 8 of Invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, there is provided a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state,
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display unit 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device enters the first state in the advantageous state,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that can recognize the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the number-of-times notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. In the value change state or the set value confirmation state, a portion in which only one segment is turned on among the segments configuring the round display 207SG131)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be performed in the number notification unit.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in Means 9 of Invention 207SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game,
Detecting means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting a state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on;
State information storage means (for example, an area of an address F002 of the RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying a state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means;
With
The game control means,
A first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) is satisfied. When the CPU 103 performs the initialization processing (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. 10-21 (A)) for initializing the game information storage means accompanied with the erasure of the game information. Executable,
A second condition (for example, when the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial process executed when the first condition is satisfied is performed. Initialization processing common to the initialization processing based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a part capable of executing the RAM clear processing and the set value change processing),
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear processing as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A)). Part not to do)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be shared between the time when the first condition is satisfied and the time when the second condition is satisfied. The initialization process based on the state information can be accurately executed while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.
The gaming machines described in the means 3 to 9 of the invention 207SG applicable to the gaming machine described in the means 1 and the means 2 of the invention 207SG are the gaming machines described in the means A and the means B of the invention 207SG described above. Can also be applied.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 208SG. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem in that it is not possible to appropriately notify that a predetermined error has occurred in the setting state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine according to Means 1 of Invention 208SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Section 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting value of the setting unit is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process illustrated in FIG. 10-22).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed on the variable display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B)). In the case where a set value abnormal error occurs, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blink.
According to this feature, a predetermined error occurs in a variable display section in which a variable display that is an important display is executed in the gaming machine even when a specific condition is satisfied. Since the notification is performed by the display, it is possible to appropriately perform the notification that the specific condition has been satisfied but the predetermined error has occurred.

Further, as a gaming machine described in Means A of Invention 208SG for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Section 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting value of the setting unit is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process illustrated in FIG. 10-22).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed on the variable display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B)). In the case where an error occurs above the set value, all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blink).
further,
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of the player;
A movable body operably provided (eg, a movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R);
The movable body is operated in conjunction with the operation of the player based on the fact that the detection means detects the operation of the player over a predetermined period during the valid period (for example, the operation reception period of the push button 31B). Specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 8-24) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a movable body effect) to be performed;
With
The specific effect execution means,
If the detection means detects the player's movement in the first situation, the movable body is operated in the first operation mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. When the push button 31B is operated in a state where the 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin positions, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are driven at high speed and with low torque by driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. Part to operate),
In the case where the operation of the player is detected by the detection means in the second situation different from the first situation, the movable body is operated in the second operation mode (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not located at the origin positions, the movable motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode to thereby move the movable bodies 177SG302L. , 177SG302R operating at low speed)
According to this feature, a predetermined error occurs in a variable display section in which a variable display that is an important display is executed in the gaming machine even when a specific condition is satisfied. Since the notification is performed by the display, it is possible to appropriately perform the notification that the specific condition has been satisfied but the predetermined error has occurred. In addition, the effect of production can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 2 of Invention 208SG,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined error is at least an error relating to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error equal to or more than the set value). It is possible to appropriately notify that an error has occurred in the storage area where is stored and that the setting value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 3 of Invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before a new set value changed in the setting state is determined, an error relating to the storage area storing the set value has occurred at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if the setting is not made, a display capable of specifying that an error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, even if the power is restored from the power interruption during the setting change as shown in FIG. (A part for blinking all segments constituting the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, it is necessary to reset the set value without a new error due to the occurrence of a power interruption before the set value is determined without a new error Can be suitably notified.
The gaming machine described in Means 2 to 3 of Invention 208SG applicable to the gaming machine described in Means 1 of Invention 208SG can be applied to the gaming machine described in Means A of Invention 208SG described above. it can.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 209SG. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to a given game value, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent No. 6220953. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 62209533 is applied to a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and an information display means for confirming set values are provided. However, there is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced when the game machines are provided separately. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine according to Means 1 of Invention 209SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can play a game using a game medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Game value providing means for providing a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc.). Part where the prize ball is paid out) and
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information (for example, a base shown in FIG. Information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying
With
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, a pachinko game When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, a part where the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state)
The number of the display units used is different between the case where the predetermined information is displayed and the case where the setting value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, when the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029). When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used. Part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, since the setting value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to the game value, a display means for displaying the setting value information is provided. There is no need to provide the gaming machine separately, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Further, as a gaming machine described in Means A of Invention 209SG for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can play a game using a game medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Game value providing means for providing a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc.). Part where the prize ball is paid out) and
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information (for example, a base shown in FIG. Information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying
With
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, a pachinko game When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, a part where the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state)
The number of the display units used is different between the case where the predetermined information is displayed and the case where the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used. 207SG029D only),
further,
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of the player;
A movable body operably provided (eg, a movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R);
The movable body is operated in conjunction with the operation of the player based on the fact that the detection means detects the operation of the player over a predetermined period during the valid period (for example, the operation reception period of the push button 31B). Specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 8-24) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a movable body effect) to be performed;
With
The specific effect execution means,
If the detection means detects the player's movement in the first situation, the movable body is operated in the first operation mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. When the push button 31B is operated in a state where the 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin positions, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are driven at high speed and with low torque by driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. Part to operate),
In the case where the operation of the player is detected by the detection means in the second situation different from the first situation, the movable body is operated in the second operation mode (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not located at the origin positions, the movable motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode to thereby move the movable bodies 177SG302L. , 177SG302R operating at low speed)
According to this feature, since the setting value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to the game value, a display means for displaying the setting value information is provided. There is no need to provide the gaming machine separately, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In addition, the effect of production can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 2 of Invention 209SG,
The information display means can display at least error information that can specify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which the setting value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), When a setting value error has occurred, “E.” is displayed in the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D).
The number of the display units used is the same between when the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (A) and 10-26 (B)). As shown in the figure, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display both show the case where the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 and the case where an abnormal error is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029. (A part using the unit 207SG029D), and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which the setting value is stored, and to provide the setting value information and Can be easily recognized as different error information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 3 of Invention 209SG,
The display unit includes a plurality of small display units that can be turned on independently (for example, each of the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D has eight display units). Segment),
Equipped with detecting means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on,
The information display means, when the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (for example, that a clear switch is ON), the small display constituting each display section. The display is in the all-lit display state in which all of the display units are turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, the fourth display unit) (All flashing and flashing portions of all segments constituting 207SG029D are repeatedly turned on and off)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it can be confirmed whether or not all of the small display portions are normal.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 209SG,
Equipped with detecting means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on,
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection unit satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display unit displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-22, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm a set value.
In addition, the gaming machine described in Means 2 to 4 of Invention 209SG applicable to the gaming machine described in Means 1 of Invention 209SG can be applied to the gaming machine described in Means A of Invention 209SG described above. it can.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 210SG. In other words, there is a conventional pachinko gaming machine that executes a check operation of a movable body based on a change operation of a set value, for example, one described in JP-A-2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the operation of checking the movable body is performed while the set value is being changed, the worker may miss the operation. Therefore, it is conceivable that the confirmation operation is performed again after the end of the operation of changing the set value. In this case, if the operation of changing the set value is completed during the first operation of confirming the movable body, the operation is terminated. The operation of confirming a new movable body is started from the timing described above, and there is a problem that the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine according to Means 1 of Invention 210SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
An operably provided movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process);
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a setting state in which the setting unit can set a setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, a clear switch, a lock switch, 207SG051, when the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, respectively, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value change processing),
The control means includes:
Confirmation operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can normally operate is performed when the state is shifted to the set state. It can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command from the actual timing). A portion for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the operation confirmation operation control, and the actual operation from the timing of receiving the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the confirmation operation control),
When the setting state is ended while the movable body is performing the checking operation by the checking operation control when shifting to the setting state, the checking operation control based on the end of the setting state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process which is being executed based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command, When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. Part where the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not performed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 2 of Invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
An operably provided movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process);
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
When the check condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a check state in which the set value set by the setting means can be checked (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the pachinko game machine 1 is cleared when it is started). When the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing);
The control means includes:
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body is normally operable. It can be executed when the state is shifted to the confirmation state and when the confirmation state is ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the effect control CPU 120 A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the start notification command, a set value change end notification command and a set value confirmation A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
If the confirmation state ends when the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the state is shifted to the confirmation state, the confirmation operation control based on the termination of the confirmation state is not performed (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command, If the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. Part where the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not performed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as a gaming machine described in Means A of Invention 210SG for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-189349,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
An operably provided movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322, or movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R);
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process);
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a setting state in which the setting unit can set a setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, a clear switch, a lock switch, 207SG051, when the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, respectively, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value change processing),
The control means includes:
Confirmation operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can normally operate is performed when the state is shifted to the set state. It can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command from the actual timing). A portion for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the operation confirmation operation control, and the actual operation from the timing of receiving the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the confirmation operation control),
When the setting state is ended while the movable body is performing the checking operation by the checking operation control when the state has shifted to the setting state, the checking operation control based on the end of the setting state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process which is being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the reception of the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command. A part that does not execute the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing),
further,
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of the player;
The movable body is operated in conjunction with the operation of the player based on the fact that the detection means detects the operation of the player over a predetermined period during the valid period (for example, the operation reception period of the push button 31B). Specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 8-24) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a movable body effect) to be performed;
With
The specific effect execution means,
If the detection means detects the player's movement in the first situation, the movable body is operated in the first operation mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. When the push button 31B is operated in a state where the 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin positions, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are driven at high speed and with low torque by driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. Part to operate),
In the case where the operation of the player is detected by the detection means in the second situation different from the first situation, the movable body is operated in the second operation mode (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not located at the origin positions, the movable motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode to thereby move the movable bodies 177SG302L. , 177SG302R operating at low speed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation. In addition, the effect of production can be improved.

Further, as a gaming machine described in Means B of Invention 210SG for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-189349,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
An operably provided movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322, or movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R);
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process);
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
When the check condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a check state in which the set value set by the setting means can be checked (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the pachinko game machine 1 is cleared when it is started). When the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing);
The control means includes:
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body is normally operable. It can be executed when the state is shifted to the confirmation state and when the confirmation state is ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the effect control CPU 120 A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the start notification command, a set value change end notification command and a set value confirmation A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
If the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control performed when shifting to the confirmation state, the confirmation operation control based on the termination of the confirmation state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process which is being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the reception of the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command. A part that does not execute the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing),
further,
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of the player;
The movable body is operated in conjunction with the operation of the player based on the fact that the detection means detects the operation of the player over a predetermined period during the valid period (for example, the operation reception period of the push button 31B). Specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 8-24) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a movable body effect) to be performed;
With
The specific effect execution means,
If the detection means detects the player's movement in the first situation, the movable body is operated in the first operation mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. When the push button 31B is operated in a state where the 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin positions, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are driven at high speed and with low torque by driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. Part to operate),
In the case where the operation of the player is detected by the detection means in the second situation different from the first situation, the movable body is operated in the second operation mode (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not located at the origin positions, the movable motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode to thereby move the movable bodies 177SG302L. , 177SG302R operating at low speed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation. In addition, the effect of production can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 3 of Invention 210SG,
The control means includes:
When the movable body is not located at the predetermined origin position, the return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. Executable before performing the control,
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is performed after the return operation ends (for example, a first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process). In which the actual operation check operation control is executed after the non-detection self-operation control is completed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 210SG,
The control means includes:
If the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the setting state or the confirmation state ends if the operation state of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), the first control based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value check start notification command). If a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the body initialization process, the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body is newly performed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. On the other hand, when the operation state of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control based on the completion of the setting state or the confirmation state is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (B), the first movable body initialization processing based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command ends. If a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization process, a new first movable body initialization process is performed after the end of the second movable body initialization process. A part for sequentially executing the second movable body initialization processing)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be performed again according to the operation state of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 5 of Invention 210SG,
Comprising a plurality of the movable bodies,
The control means includes:
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially performed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process),
If the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all of the movable bodies, if the number of the movable bodies that have completed the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition, The confirmation operation control based on the completion of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command. When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the first movable body initialization processing, the first first movable body initialization processing is newly performed after the execution of the second movable body initialization processing. (Part where the movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not performed) On the other hand, if the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the setting state is not reached. Executes the confirmation operation control based on the completion of the confirmation state for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (B), the effect control CPU 120 If the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the confirmation start notification command is completed, and a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization processing, (A part where the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are newly executed in order after the second movable body initialization processing is completed)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be performed again according to the operation state of the confirmation operation.
The gaming machine described in the means 3 to 5 of the invention 210SG applicable to the gaming machine described in the means 1 and the means 2 of the invention 210SG described above is the gaming machine described in the means A and the means B of the invention 210SG described above. Can also be applied.

  Although the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment has been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention, the present invention is not limited thereto. Included in the invention.

  For example, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display portion 207SG200 is provided with the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second hold display device 207SG025B, Although the form which comprised the symbol display 207SG020, the general figure hold | maintenance display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probable change lamp 207SG133, and the time reduction lamp 207SG134 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this. The game information display unit 207SG200 need only include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) or is executing the set value check process (set value check state). Although the mode in which the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on in the same mode has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be turned on or off in different cases depending on whether there is a setting value confirmation process. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by the lighting mode or the flashing mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, all the segments configuring the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on, and The display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result. Although the form of making the difference is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is described. Aspect) is the first special symbol display device 207S If the display mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004B or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, of the segments forming the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It is not necessary to light some segments.

  Also, in the feature value 207SG of the above embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments and the round display 207SG131, which are composed of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, are configured. Illustrated is a mode in which one segment is turned on, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and all the segments constituting the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B blink, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is turned on, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 blinks, and the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B are configured. Of all segments The dark, not executed, or may be executed only partially.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is turned on, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Is not limited to this. If the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 10-6, the number of lighting of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is plural. There may be.

  Also, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are used to execute the notification of the set value abnormality error has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, an LED for error notification may be separately provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The machine 1 may not be provided with the display monitor 207SG029. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029, a new display means for displaying the set value (or the provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be provided. .

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body A new first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process is performed depending on whether the initialization process is being performed, that is, whether the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. Although the form for determining whether to execute is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and whether to execute a new first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process is determined by: The determination may be made according to the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display portion 207SG200, The form in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by setting the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed ramp 207SG132, and the like in a mode different from that during the game is illustrated. Is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second hold display device 207SG025B, the round display that constitutes the game information display unit 207SG200 Vessel 2 7SG0131, the like right-handed lamp 207SG132, may have a structure in which pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in the notification if during the game that the setting value is changed status and settings confirmation state (lit or flashing).

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display portion 207SG200, The form in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by setting the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed ramp 207SG132, and the like in a mode different from that during the game is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the “different mode from during the game” may include different flashing periods, different luminances, different light emission colors of each segment, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization are performed when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. As the processing, the form in which the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body are executed has been exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. From the time when the command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, the non-detection operation control of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. Alternatively, actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display portion 207SG200, The form in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by turning on or blinking the round display 207 SG 131 and the right strike lamp 207 SG 132 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, Lau De indicator 207SG131, may be provided with written description of the lighting or blinking of the right-handed light 207SG132 is executed at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (e.g., the vicinity of the gaming information display unit 207SG200). By doing so, a clerk at a game hall or the like who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation. Lighting or blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 can be prevented from being erroneously recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the game control main process of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y), or the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the form in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Is not when the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the set value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (2 7SGSa014; Y) to be executed.

DESCRIPTION OF REFERENCE NUMERALS 1 pachinko gaming machine 2 gaming board 4A first special symbol display device 4B second special symbol display device 5 image display device (effect display device)
11 main board 12 effect control board 100 game control microcomputer 103 CPU
120 Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can play games,
Detecting means capable of detecting the movement of the player;
A movable body operably provided;
Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect of operating the movable body in conjunction with the operation of the player, based on the fact that the operation of the player is detected by the detection means over a predetermined period during the validity period When,
With
The specific effect execution means,
When the detection means detects the player's movement in the first situation, the movable body is operated in the first operation mode,
If the detection means detects a player's movement in a second situation different from the first situation, the movable body is operated in a second operation mode,
further,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating that it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player;
Title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute at least a first suggestion effect and a second suggestion effect as the suggestion effect,
The gaming machine, wherein the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect in the second suggestion effect.